Quarterlytics / Packaging & Containers / Macfarlane Group PLC

Macfarlane Group PLC

macf · LSE
Claim this profile
Ticker macf
Exchange LSE
Sector
Industry Packaging & Containers
Employees 501-1000
← All annual reports
FY2020 Annual Report · Macfarlane Group PLC
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
M

a

c

f

a

r

l

a

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

P

L

C

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

0

Annual Report and Accounts 2020
Creating value from innovative packaging solutions

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Contents
Overview
01  
02  

 Financial highlights 2020
 Macfarlane Group –  
serving our customers

 Chairman's statement
 Business model and strategy

Strategic review
04  
06  
08    Chief Executive’s review
14    Managing the Covid-19 pandemic
18  
20   Principal risks and uncertainties
24  
 Stakeholder engagement
27  Viability statement
28    Corporate responsibility

 Finance review 

Governance
36   Board of Directors
38   Report of the Directors
41   Remuneration report 
53   Corporate governance
 Statement of Directors’ 
62  
responsibilities

Financial statements
63  

71  
71  

72  

 Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC
 Consolidated income statement
 Consolidated statement of 
comprehensive income
 Consolidated statement of changes  
in equity 
 Consolidated balance sheet
 Consolidated cash flow statement

73  
74  
75   Accounting policies
82  
106  Company balance sheet
107   Company statement of changes 

 Notes to the financial statements

in equity

108   Notes to the Company financial 

statements

Shareholder information
119   Five year record 
120   Principal operating subsidiaries  
and related undertakings

IBC   Financial diary

View our Annual Report and  
Accounts and other information  
about Macfarlane Group at  
www.macfarlanegroup.com

Financial highlights 2020

Macfarlane Group PLC designs, manufactures  
and distributes protective packaging products  
and labels to business users. Protective packaging 
products are sold to customers in the UK, Ireland 
and Europe. Labels are sold to customers in the 
UK, mainland Europe and the USA.

Sales

Profit before tax

£230.0m
(2019* £225.2m)

£13.0m
(2019* £11.9m)

Operating profit (as % of sales)

Dividend

6.2%
(2019* 6.0%)

2.55p
(2019 0.69p**)

Sales growth

Gross margin

2.1%
(2019* 3.7%)

33.3%
(2019* 32.0%)

* 

   Restatement resulting in a reduction in turnover and 
profit before tax of £0.2 million relating to backdated 
duty with details set out on pages 18, 76 and 77.

**  2019 final dividend of 1.76p was cancelled.

01 Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Macfarlane Group – serving our customers

Headquartered in Glasgow, Macfarlane Group PLC  
employs over 900 people at 33 sites in the UK, one each  
in Ireland, Sweden and The Netherlands and services  
more than 20,000 customers in a wide range of sectors.

Europe *

Sales £10.2m
No. of employees 27
No. of vehicles 2
No. of sites 3
No. of customers 1,404

North *

Sales £77.0m
No. of employees 249
No. of vehicles 37
No. of sites 10
No. of customers 4,343

Midlands *

Sales £68.2m
No. of employees 261
No. of vehicles 47
No. of sites 9
No. of customers 3,530

South west *

Sales £23.2m
No. of employees 98
No. of vehicles 18
No. of sites 5
No. of customers 1,470

South east *

Sales £56.7m
No. of employees 147
No. of vehicles 31
No. of sites 7
No. of customers 9,537

02   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

*    Numbers relate to operating sites only. Sales  
are stated before adjusting for inter-company  
and inter-divisional sales.

Packaging Distribution

Packaging Design 
and Manufacture

Labels 

Sweden

Helsingborg

Inverness

The Netherlands

Venlo

Glasgow

Kilmarnock

Newcastle

Stockton-on-Tees

Leyland

Wigan

Wake�eld

Manchester

Wicklow

Nottingham

Grantham

Wolverhampton

Leicester

Coventry

Milton Keynes

Sudbury

Harlow

Aylesbury

Reading

Horsham

Gloucester

Bristol

Westbury

Fareham

Exeter

Plymouth

03

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
 
Chairman’s statement

Macfarlane Group PLC (’the Group’)  
has performed well in 2020, achieving  
a resilient performance which, despite 
the challenging market conditions due 
to the impact of Covid-19 is ahead  
of our previous expectations.

The Board wishes to thank all of our 
people for their exceptional hard work 
and dedication, which ensured that we 
effectively supported our customers 
throughout 2020 in the most difficult 
circumstances.

Stuart R. Paterson
Chairman

04   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

At the outset of the Covid-19 
pandemic, we acted decisively  
and responsibly to ensure that  
we protected the interests of our 
employees as well as other key 
stakeholders and all our sites 
remained operational serving 
customers throughout the year. 

The Group performance in 2020  
is a testament to the quality and 
commitment of our people, the 
diversity of our customer base and 
our strong added value proposition. 

Trading
Macfarlane Group achieved a 2.1% 
increase in sales to £230.0 million in 
2020, (2019: Restated* £225.2 million), 
with 2020 profit before tax increasing 
to £13.0 million (2019: Restated* 
£11.9 million), 9.6% ahead of 2019.

Packaging Distribution increased 
sales by 2.6% in 2020 to £201.7 million 
(2019: £196.7 million). Sales revenue 
from existing customers benefited 
from underlying strength in the 
e-commerce, household essentials 
and medical sectors partially offset 
by weaker demand from sectors 
most affected by Covid-19, namely 
automotive, aerospace, high street 
retail and hospitality. Sales also 
benefited from the 2019 acquisitions 
of Ecopac and Leyland Packaging, as 
well as the January 2020 acquisition 
of Armagrip. 

Gross margin in Packaging Distribution 
at 32.5% showed improvement on the 
prior year (2019: 31.1%) and reflected 
effective management of input price 
movements, customer mix changes 
and increased online activity. The 
growth in sales and margin was 
partially offset by an increase in  
bad debt and end of lease property 
provisions totalling £1.9 million which 
resulted in Packaging Distribution 
achieving a 12.8% increase in 
operating profit to £14.0 million 
(2019: £12.4 million).

Sales in Manufacturing Operations  
at £28.3 million (2019: Restated* 
£28.5 million) showed a 0.9% decrease 

Group performance

2019*
225.2

2020
230.0

Sales (£m)

2020
13.0

2019*
11.9

Profit before tax (£m)

2019*
6.09

2020
6.45

Basic earnings per share (p)

on the previous year. Strong demand 
from the food, medical and household 
essentials sectors in the Labels 
business was more thanoffset by 
weaker demand from the aerospace 
and automotive sectors in the 
Packaging Design and Manufacture 
business. Operating profit in 2020 
decreased to £0.4 million (2019: 
Restated* £1.1 million).

Pension scheme
The Group’s pension deficit at  
31 December 2020 reduced to  
£1.5 million (2019: £6.5 million). 
Although the discount rate 
decreased, increasing the value  
of pension liabilities, this was offset  
by increases in the value of the 
scheme’s holding in liability-driven 
investments and other investments. 

The triennial valuation of the pension 
scheme on 1 May 2020 has now been 
concluded and the Group has agreed 
with the Scheme Trustees to reduce 
contributions from £3.1 million to 
£1.3 million per annum with effect 
from 1 May 2021. The recovery 
period for deficit contributions  
now runs until April 2024.

Outlook
2021 has started well despite the 
ongoing impact of Covid-19. There 
are still significant uncertainties about 
the duration of disruption caused by 
lockdowns and the consequential 
impact on demand levels which 
means that 2021 will be another 
challenging year. However the Board 
is confident that, given the resilience 
seen in 2020, the strength of our 
business model and the commitment 
of our people, Macfarlane Group will 
progress in 2021 and is well positioned 
to benefit when the UK economy 
begins to recover.

Stuart R. Paterson 
Chairman

25 February 2021

After net finance costs of £1.4 million 
(2019: £1.6 million), Group profit 
before tax totalled £13.0 million,  
£1.1 million ahead of 2019. Basic and 
diluted earnings per share were 6.45p 
(2019: Restated* 6.09p) and 6.42p 
(2019: Restated* 6.07p) respectively.

Dividend
The Board is proposing a final dividend 
of 1.85 pence per share, amounting to 
a full year dividend of 2.55 pence per 
share, compared to the prior year 
dividend of 0.69 pence per share which 
was impacted by the cancellation  
of the proposed final dividend of  
1.76 pence per share, as one of the 
key Covid-19 cash conservation 
measures. Subject to the approval of 
shareholders at the Annual General 
Meeting on Tuesday 11 May 2021, the 
final dividend will be paid on Thursday  
3 June 2021 to those shareholders  
on the register at Friday 14 May 2021.

Net bank debt
The Group’s net bank borrowing  
at 31 December 2020 reduced to  
£0.5 million from £12.7 million at the 
previous year-end. The improved cash 
position has been achieved primarily 
through effective management of 
working capital. The full benefit of all 
government support and deferral 
programmes totalling £5.4 million  
was repaid during the year. Deferred 
considerations on the Ecopac and 
Leyland acquisitions in 2019 totalling 
£1.8 million were paid during 2020. The 
Group’s bank facility of £30.0 million 
with Lloyds Banking Group has been 
extended until December 2025 and 
accommodates normal working 
capital requirements as well as 
supporting acquisition funding.

*    Restatement resulting in a reduction in turnover and 
profit before tax of £0.2 million relating to backdated 
duty with details set out on pages 18, 76 and 77.

05

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Business model and strategy

Our business model

What we do
Macfarlane Group designs, manufactures and distributes protective packaging products and  
labels for business users across a range of sectors including e-commerce retail, logistics, medical, 
automotive, aerospace, electronics, high street retail, household essentials, food and hospitality.  
For reporting purposes, we split the Group into two segments, Macfarlane Packaging Distribution and 
Manufacturing Operations, comprising Macfarlane Design and Manufacture and Macfarlane Labels.

Our customer profile
Protective packaging products are sold to customers in the UK and Ireland, with an increasing 
presence in Europe. Labels are sold to customers in the UK, mainland Europe and the USA. 

The role of Stock and Serve
The protective packaging business operates a Stock and Serve model from 25 Regional Distribution 
Centres (RDCs) and 3 satellite sites providing a UK national network to support customers on a local, 
regional and national basis.

> 1,000 
global suppliers of 
protective packaging

25 
Regional Distribution 
Centres (RDCs)

>  20,000 
customers throughout 
the UK

How our business generates value
Macfarlane is the UK market leader in the distribution of protective packaging products. We leverage  
our purchasing scale to cost-effectively source from over 1,000 suppliers, a comprehensive  
range of protective packaging products.

Added value for the customer is achieved as follows:

•  By providing independent advice on the most cost-effective choice of product  

and packing processes via our unique Significant Six process.

• The sustainability of our product offering. 

•   By operating as a single-source supplier for these products on a Just In Time basis,  
with tailored stock management programmes and electronic trading capability. 

Key benefits to customers are lower costs in the areas of packing, logistics and warehousing,  
reduced customer returns and product damage and enhanced brand presentation.

The manufacturing businesses utilise design, intellectual property and know-how to provide a 
bespoke service to support major industrial customers to cost-effectively protect their high-value 
products in storage and distribution and for FMCG customers to attractively display and accurately 
identify their products at the point of sale.

The role for organic growth
Macfarlane Group’s strategy is to grow its business organically by increasing the range of products  
supplied to existing customers and by winning new customers. New business generation is key to 
Macfarlane Group’s organic growth and we have specialist teams, providing focus on specific target 
market sectors to win new customers. We then target acquisition growth through the purchase of 
high-quality businesses in the protective packaging market.

06   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Our strategy

We have followed a consistent strategy to create value for shareholders, operating in markets 
which offer above-average growth opportunities to develop business with existing customers 
and build relationships with new customers. 
At the same time we improve the operational performance of the business by more effective 
sourcing and increasing the efficiency of our logistics and property portfolio. We then 
supplement this growth in the existing business by acquiring quality businesses.
Our objective is to achieve a pre-tax return on sales of between 5% and 7% (2020: 5.7%),  
with the following six key strategic priorities.
The key financial KPIs used in the Group are sales growth, gross margin, operating profit margin 
and profit before tax.

Strategic priority

Progress in 2020

Sales
Implement a segmental sales 
strategy to improve customer 
retention levels, increase product 
penetration and accelerate  
new business.

Sectors
Focus on key sectors with growth 
potential, particularly National 
Accounts, Third Party Logistics  
and E-Commerce Retail.

Gross margin
Enhance gross margins through 
focus on higher added value 
products and more effective 
sourcing.

Logistics
Ensure operational effectiveness  
is maximised through efficiencies  
in logistics.

Infrastructure
Optimising the costs associated 
with the physical infrastructure.

Acquisitions
Supplement organic growth 
with at least two good quality 
acquisitions each year.

The segmental sales approach has provided increased 
customer focus. Despite the issues caused by Covid-19,  
new business generated in Packaging Distribution was  
£11.3 million in 2020 (2019: £12.5 million).

Net Promoter Score (NPS) was 53 (2019: 50) reflecting  
the success of our strategy.

The Macfarlane Innovation Lab continues to prove an effective 
tool to demonstrate the range of our capability to customers.

Retail sales in Packaging Distribution represent 28% of sales 
(2019: 23%), the majority of this being e-commerce retail 
customers.

Strategic and tactical purchasing programmes are in place  
to improve our sourcing capability in Packaging Distribution. 

Gross margins within Manufacturing Operations have also 
increased during the year as we improved operational 
performance.

Logistics costs in Packaging Distribution increased to 2.4%  
of sales (2019: 2.3%) primarily due to the impact of Covid-19.

Property costs in Packaging Distribution are 4.5% of sales 
(2019: 4.6%). 

Our aim is to reduce the costs below 4.0% of sales.

We completed the Armagrip acquisition in January 2020. 
Given Covid-19, acquisition activity was put on hold but  
has now been re-activated.

07

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chief Executive’s review – Packaging Distribution

Packaging Distribution 
performance

2019
196.7

2020
201.7

Sales (£m)

2020
14.0

2019
12.4

Operating profit (£m)

2020
6.9

2019
6.3

Return on sales (%)

Macfarlane Packaging Distribution is 
the leading UK specialist distributor 
of protective packaging materials. 
Macfarlane operates a Stock and 
Serve supply model from 25 Regional 
Distribution Centres (RDCs) and 
three satellite sites, supplying 
industrial and retail customers with  
a comprehensive range of protective 
packaging materials on a local, 
regional and national basis.

Competition in the packaging 
distribution market is from local  
and regional protective packaging 
specialist companies as well as 
national/international distribution 
generalists who supply a range  
of products, including protective 
packaging materials. Macfarlane 
competes effectively on a local basis 
through its strong focus on and regular 
monitoring of customer service, its 
breadth and depth of product offer 
and through the recruitment and 
retention of high-quality staff with 
good local market knowledge. On a 
national basis Macfarlane has focus, 
expertise and a breadth of product and 
service knowledge, all of which enables 
it to compete effectively against 
non-specialist packaging distributors.

Macfarlane benefits its customers by 
enabling them to ensure their products 
are cost-effectively protected in transit 

and storage through the supply of a 
comprehensive product range, single 
source Stock and Serve supply,  
Just In Time delivery, tailored stock 
management programmes, electronic 
trading and independent advice on 
both packaging materials and the 
packing processes.

2020 trading
Packaging Distribution grew sales by 
2.6% in 2020. Despite the challenges 
of Covid-19 existing business has 
remained resilient with strong 
demand in the e-commerce, 
household essentials and medical 
sectors offsetting weaker demand 
from customers in the automotive, 
aerospace, hospitality and high 
street retail sectors. Sales to retail 
companies in 2020 represents 28%  
of sales (2019: 23%). 

Whilst new business growth has 
been more subdued due to limited 
engagement with potential customers 
through the Covid-19 lockdown 
period, new business generation of 
£11.3 million (2019: £12.5 million) was 
achieved. The impact of lockdowns 
meant a change in buying behaviour 
with increasing numbers of customers 
choosing to buy online through our 
shop.macfarlanepackaging.com 
website or through our Simplict-e 
electronic trading platform.

Packaging Distribution

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross margin
Operating expenses

Operating profit

2020
£000

2019
£000

201,739
136,177

65,562
51,574

13,988

196,706
135,525

61,181
48,775

12,406

2020 
growth

2.6%

7.2%
5.7%

12.8%

08   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Our Innovation Lab

Located in Milton Keynes,  
the Innovation Lab is a purpose 
built space to create solutions 
for the most demanding 
packaging challenges.

Significant savings
The ultimate purpose of the 
Innovation Lab is to optimise pack 
design and packaging operations  
and thereby reduce cost  
throughout the supply chain.

Cutting edge technology
Our state-of-the-art technology 
includes interactive touchscreens, 
digital printers and augmented  
reality solutions.

Features and benefits
These can range from customer 
experience, operational efficiencies 
and optimised, sustainable  
packaging solutions.

09

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chief Executive’s review – Packaging Distribution  
(continued)

The gross margin in Packaging 
Distribution improved to 32.5%, 
(2019: 31.1%) through our 
effectiveness in managing input 
price changes, a more favourable 
customer mix and the growth in 
customers transacting online.

We continued to deliver the benefit 
from acquiring high quality packaging 
distribution businesses and in January 
2020 we completed the acquisition  
of the packaging trade and assets of 
Armagrip. During 2020 the earn-out 
programmes for the 2019 acquisitions 
of Ecopac and Leyland were 
concluded, with both achieving  
close to maximum payments. 

During 2020 we made steady 
progress in extending our service 
into Europe to support a number  
of our pan-European customers.  
A Macfarlane subsidiary company, 
Macfarlane Group BV, was set up  
in The Netherlands to service 
customers in the Benelux region  
and whilst still in the early stages, 
achieved sales of £1.1 million in 2020.

Overhead increases were primarily 
due to the impact of acquisitions  
(£1.3 million), bad debt costs  
(£1.0 million), end of lease 
dilapidations (£0.9 million) and  
some incremental Covid-19 costs. 

Packaging Distribution’s operating 
profit at £14.0 million grew 12.8% vs 
2019 reflecting a 6.9% (2019: 6.3%) 
return on sales.

•  Accelerate the good progress  

we have made in our ’Follow the 
Customer’ programme in Europe;
•  Reduce operating costs through 
efficiency programmes in sales, 
logistics and administration;
•  Maintain the focus on working 

capital management to facilitate 
future investment and manage 
effectively the bad debt risk which 
has increased in the current 
economic environment; and
•  Supplement organic growth 
through progressing further 
suitable quality acquisitions.

Future plans
2021 plans are focused on  
continuing to grow sales and 
improving profitability through  
the following actions:

•  Prioritise engagement with 
potential new customers in  
stable and growing sectors  
such as e-commerce, medical  
and third party logistics (’3PL’);
•  Invest in new technology to allow 
our sales teams to demonstrate 
our ability to add value for 
customers through ongoing 
implementation of our ’Significant 
Six’ sales approach to optimise 
their ’Total Cost of Packaging’  
in both face-to-face and virtual 
environments;

•  Extend the penetration of  

our web-based solutions and 
technologies to enable customers 
improved on line access to our full 
range of products and services;

10   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Chief Executive’s review – Manufacturing Operations

Manufacturing Operations 
performance

2019*
28.5

2020
28.3

Sales (£m)

2019*
1.1

2020
0.4

2020
1.3

Operating profit (£m)

2019*
3.8

Return on sales (%)

Manufacturing Operations  
comprise our Packaging Design  
and Manufacture business and  
our Labels business.

The principal activity of the 
Packaging Design and Manufacture 
business is the design, manufacture 
and assembly of custom-designed 
packaging solutions for customers 
requiring cost-effective methods  
of protecting high value products  
in storage and transit. The primary 
raw materials are corrugate, timber 
and foam. The business operates 
from two manufacturing sites, in 
Grantham and Westbury, supplying 
both directly to customers and also 
through the national RDC network of 
the Packaging Distribution business.

Key market sectors are defence, 
aerospace, medical equipment, 
electronics and automotive. Our 
markets are highly fragmented with  
a range of locally based competitors. 
We differentiate our market offering 
through technical expertise, design 
capability, industry accreditations 
and national coverage through the 
Packaging Distribution business.

Our Labels business designs and 
prints self-adhesive labels for major 
Fast-moving Consumer Goods 
(’FMCG’) customers in the UK and 
Europe and resealable labels for 
major customers in the UK, Europe 
and the USA. The business operates 
from production sites in Kilmarnock 

and Wicklow and a sales and design 
office in Sweden, which focuses on 
the development and growth of our 
resealable labels business, Reseal-it.

The Labels business has a high level 
of dependence on a small number  
of major customers. Management 
works closely with these key 
customers to ensure high levels of 
service and to introduce product and 
service development initiatives to 
achieve competitive differentiation.

2020 trading
2020 sales for Packaging Design  
and Manufacture were 20.2% below 
2019 due to weak demand in the 
aerospace and automotive sectors. 
Given the weakness in sales, 
particularly in the aerospace sector, 
which is expected to continue for 
some time, actions were taken in  
the second half of 2020 to realign 
the cost base in order to return  
the business to profitability in 2021. 
As a result of the lower sales and the 
one-off impact of effecting these 
cost reductions, the business made  
a small loss in 2020.

Labels’ sales increased by 10.6%  
in the year due to higher demand 
from existing customers in the food, 
household essentials and hygiene 
sectors. Overhead costs increased, 
due primarily to higher transportation 
costs servicing overseas customers 
in a Covid-19 environment. Profit in 
2020 was marginally above 2019.

Manufacturing Operations

Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross margin
Operating expenses

Operating profit

2020
£000

28,290
17,306

10,984
10,603

381

Restated*
2019
£000

28,540
17,731

10,809
9,728

1,081

2020 
growth

(0.9%)

1.6%
9.0%

(64.8%)

*    Restatement resulting in a reduction in turnover and 
profit before tax of £0.2 million relating to backdated 
duty with details set out on pages 18, 76 and 77.

11

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Chief Executive’s review – Manufacturing Operations  
(continued)

Future plans
Priorities for the Manufacturing 
Operations in 2021 are to:

•  Re-focus the Design and 

Manufacture sales team on  
growth sectors, such as Medical  
and Defence;

•  Prioritise new sales activity on  

our higher added-value bespoke 
composite pack product range;

•  Continue to strengthen the 

relationship between our Design 
and Manufacture operations  
and our Packaging Distribution 
business to create both sales  
and cost synergies;

•  Ensure the cost saving actions  
in 2020 return the Design and 
Manufacture business to 
profitability in 2021;

•  Accelerate the Reseal-it growth 
momentum through improved 
geographic penetration,  
extending the product range  
and introducing Reseal-it to  
new product sectors; and

•  Secure efficiency benefits from the 
additional labels printing capacity  
in our Kilmarnock site. 

12   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Chief Executive’s review – Group

Group performance

Revenue
2020
£000

Operating
 profit
2020
£000

Restated*
Revenue
2019
£000

Segment
Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Group total

Operating profit

201,739
28,290

230,029

13,988
381

14,369

6.2%

196,706
28,540

225,246

Restated*
Operating
profit
2019
£000

12,406
1,081

13,487

6.0%

2021 trading
The Covid-19 pandemic had a 
significant impact on Macfarlane 
Group in 2020. We had to quickly 
introduce new working practices  
to protect the health, safety and 
wellbeing of our employees, continue 
to provide high levels of service to our 
customers and ensure the financial 
stability of the Group.

Many of our customers depend  
on our packaging to supply their 
essential goods and services to 
consumers, critical businesses  
and the NHS. Our effectiveness in 
maintaining supply to our customers 
reflects favourably on the quality and 
commitment of our people and the 
strength of our business model.

Despite the significant challenges  
the Group has faced, the financial 
performance in 2020 has been 
resilient with sales growth of 2.1% 
and an operating profit performance 
6.5% ahead of 2019.

The impact of Covid-19 will remain  
for some time. However, Macfarlane 
Group has demonstrated its resilience 
in 2020 and is well positioned to 
benefit when the UK economy begins 
to recover. We have a strong financial 
position, a diverse customer base, 
added value customer propositions,  
a successful acquisition track record 
and experienced, high quality people. 

2021 outlook
In 2021 we will continue to add value for 
our protective packaging customers 
through our Significant Six sales 
approach and support them to reduce 
cost in their packaging operations and 
achieve their sustainability objectives. 

Our sales focus will be on sectors such 
as e-commerce, which have strong 
growth potential, and industrial sectors 
where we can add value through our 
sales approach and national network  
of RDCs. We will respond to customers 
looking to consolidate their purchasing 
through our European ’Follow the 
Customer’ strategy.

In 2021, we plan to acquire further 
good quality protective packaging 
businesses, improve penetration of 
new products introduced by recent 
acquisitions, continue to develop our 
partnerships with strategic suppliers 
and invest in new technology to 
improve operational efficiency  
and sales effectiveness.

Macfarlane Group’s businesses all 
have strong market positions with 
differentiated product and service 
offerings. We have a flexible business 
model and a clear strategic plan 
incorporating a range of actions, 
which are being effectively 
implemented. This has been 
reflected in consistent profit growth 
in the ten years to 2019 and in the 
most difficult circumstances profits 
have increased again in 2020.

Our future performance is largely 
dependent on the successful 
execution of actions to grow sales, 
increase efficiencies and bring 
high-quality acquisitions into the 
Group. Despite the continuing 
challenges from the Covid-19 
pandemic, our strategy and  
business model have proved resilient. 
We expect 2021 to be a year of 
progress for Macfarlane Group. 

Peter D. Atkinson
Chief Executive

25 February 2021

Profit before tax (£m)

2020 represents the 
11th consecutive year  
of profit growth

2014
5.6

2013 
5.1

2012 
4.5

2011 
3.9

2009 
3.2

2010 
3.4

2020 
13.0

2019 
11.9

2018 
10.7

2017 
9.1

2016 
7.6

2015 
6.8

*    Restatement resulting in a reduction in turnover and 
profit before tax of £0.2 million relating to backdated  
duty with details set out pages 18, 76 and 77.

13

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Managing the Covid-19 pandemic (’Covid-19’)

During March 2020 the UK Government 
issued guidance in response to Covid-19 
which introduced a national lockdown 
and social distancing rules. Reduced 
activity in the UK economy and 
restrictions on personal behaviour 
continued during 2020 and still  
remain in place in February 2021.

The Group’s response to Covid-19  
has focused on:
-  The safety and wellbeing of our people;
- Protecting our financial position; and
- Maintaining service to our customers. 

14   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

The measures taken throughout the 
period are detailed below together 
with a summary of the ongoing impact 
on Macfarlane Group, its employees, 
customers and other stakeholders.

Crisis management
A Covid-19 project team (’Covid-19 
team’) comprising senior managers 
from across the Group was 
established in February 2020 to 
review and lead the implementation  
of our business continuity plans. The 
Covid-19 team reported regularly  
to Executive management and  
the Board.

The project team has managed  
the Group’s response to the 
pandemic, adapting actions to 
respond to changing government 
legislation and advice. The team has 
also consulted with outside experts 
to provide ongoing learning and has 
benchmarked its actions against 
other businesses. 

In the first stages, the Covid-19  
team focused on implementing 
safety protocols for those employees 
working on site, the application of  
the furlough scheme and ensuring 
employees were equipped to work 
from home, or where required  
shield or self-isolate. Employees  
on furlough were paid 80% of their  
full pay throughout the furlough 
period, although all employees were 
topped-up at the Group’s expense  
to ensure no member of staff was 
paid less than minimum wage. 

Our Covid-19 team reviewed and 
implemented the Group’s procedures 
in response to local, regional and 
national lockdowns, ensuring that we 
complied with local guidelines and 
continued to provide safe working 
environments and protection for  
our employees’ wellbeing.

Specific initiatives included:

(a)   Mental Health Awareness 

training for senior managers;

(b)   Employee engagement  

activities; and

(c)   Care packages for employees 

and their families.

Managing our people
Our front line employees including 
warehouse, production and delivery 
staff were encouraged and supported 
to operate as normal. At the start of 
the third quarter, payments of £250 
were made to all operational staff 
who had worked on site throughout 
the second quarter of the year.

The majority of our office-based 
staff worked successfully from  
home in accordance with our  
home working protocols. 

Our Human Resources team has 
enhanced the health and wellbeing 
support available to staff, particularly 
for those in vulnerable groups as  
well as those undertaking extended 
periods of home working. The team 
ensured that all employees whether 
working on site or at home received 
regular communications regarding 
the Group’s response to Covid-19, 
regular care packages including 
supplies of hand sanitisers and 
face-coverings for staff and their 
families and for all employees on 
long-term furlough, one-to-one  
calls to ensure their wellbeing.

All 2020 Bonus Programmes were 
cancelled and a new incentive 
programme was introduced  
enabling employees to participate in  
a Performance Award Scheme which 
would reward based on the profitability 
of their respective business.

Financial management
Financial modelling was completed  
in March 2020 which stress tested 
the Group’s ability to survive a  
range of scenarios both short-term 
and long-term focusing on levels of 
customer demand and the resultant 
finance requirements.

Following this stress testing actions 
were taken to preserve cash and 
control costs. These actions included:

(a)   furloughing employees, utilising 
the Coronavirus Job Retention 
Scheme (’CJRS’);

(b)   deferring VAT and PAYE payments 
in accordance with Government 
pronouncements;

(c)   cancelling the 2019 final dividend 

of 1.76p per share;

(d)   deferring all acquisition activity;
(e)   eliminating non-essential capital 

and revenue spending; 
 cancelling 2020 incentive schemes;

(f) 
(g)   Board members waiving 25% 
salary for six months; and
(h)   engaging with all suppliers, 

including landlords and pension 
trustees to explore the Group’s 
ability to defer payments.

Given the uncertainty throughout the 
economy, the Group withdrew profit 
guidance to the market in March 2020.

There was a strong focus by  
the finance teams on day to day 
management of working capital, 
including increased diligence over 
customer credit, the conversion  
of trade receivables and closely 
managing inventory levels in line  
with changing customer demand. 

It became clear during the second 
quarter of 2020 that reductions in 
activity would not be as severe as had 
been initially modelled and that there 
would be no requirement for the 
Group to seek additional finance from 
our bank, government supported loan 
schemes, suppliers or shareholders. 

At the end of 2020 our committed 
bank borrowing facility of £30 million 
was extended from June 2022 to 
December 2025 to provide greater 
financial certainty over a longer period.

Customer impact
Customers we serve in the 
e-commerce retail, hygiene, 
household essentials, medical and 
food sectors demonstrated strong 
demand as they played a vital role  
in helping the country meet the 
challenge of Covid-19. However, 
customers in industrial sectors 
particularly aerospace and automotive 
were materially impacted by lockdown 
activity and demand levels reduced.

As the year progressed our strong 
customer sectors continued to 
perform well with recovery in some of 
the industrial sectors with businesses 
beginning to return to work as they 
implemented revised working 
protocols for their staff.

Customer service
All our sites remained open and trading 
throughout 2020. Staffing levels were 
adjusted to service reduced demand, 
with social distancing and hygiene 
measures established to protect the 
health, safety and wellbeing of our 
staff and customers.

Our Covid-19 team reviewed and 
implemented the Group’s procedures 
to re-open sites to employees who 
had previously worked from home. 
They ensured that all our employees 
could work in a Covid-19 safe 
environment including the provision  
of clear signage and barriers to 
manage social distancing, protective 
equipment, hand sanitising stations, 
temperature checking, regular 
cleaning and ongoing education.

All sites were risk assessed by our 
Health and Safety team and all external 
visits and assessments from the 
Health and Safety Executive validated 
that the measures taken throughout 
the Group were appropriate.

15

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Managing the Covid-19 pandemic (’Covid-19’)  
(continued)

Communication
The 2020 AGM was held virtually  
in line with Government guidelines 
with only Directors and Registrars 
attending on a virtual basis. 

There has been regular dialogue with 
shareholders to keep them updated 
on key operational and financial issues. 

Throughout 2020 ongoing updates 
were held by Executive Directors with 
the senior management and local 
management teams in order to 
communicate progress, the sharing 
of ideas and addressing any concerns 
about how the Group was responding 
to the pandemic.

All employees received frequent 
communications providing support 
and guidance throughout the year. In 
addition to our normal communication 
with customers, a regular letter gave 
them clarity on our service offering 
and key business developments.

A Covid-19 Hotline was established 
for any employee to have direct, 
confidential access if they had any 
concerns or required additional 
support regarding the impact of 
Covid-19.

A number of surveys were carried out 
with both customers and employees 
to ensure we were fully aware of 
issues, concerns and their priorities.

We maintained close contact with 
our key suppliers particularly in the 
final quarter of the year when volatile 
demand patterns created some 
stress within supply chains.

Financial performance
Group sales reduced by 2.0% in the 
first half of 2020 compared to the 
same period in 2019 and net bank 
borrowings reduced by £11.9 million 
over the six month period to  
£0.8 million. We saw an increase  
in our bad debt experience in the 
second quarter.

On announcing the interim results on 
27 August 2020, market guidance was 
restored and dividends to shareholders 
recommenced, with the declaration of 
an interim dividend of 0.70p per share 
which was paid in October 2020.

2021 and beyond
Covid-19 continues to have a 
significant impact across the world 
constraining day-to-day life and 
having wide-ranging impacts on  
our operations. 

Following better than expected 
trading levels in the second quarter, 
CJRS monies received of £1.3 million 
were repaid in full and £4.1 million of 
deferred taxes were brought up to 
date. In total amounts equating to 
£5.4 million were repaid to HMRC  
by the end of August 2020.

During the third quarter Group sales 
increased by 4.7% compared to the 
same period in 2019 and Group  
bank debt was £1.0 million after the 
repayment of all CJRS monies and 
tax deferrals totalling £5.4 million. In 
the final quarter of 2020, Group sales 
increased by 6.9% compared to the 
same period in 2019 and Group debt 
was £0.5 million. Given the strong 
performance in the final quarter  
of the year, we were able to:

(a)   make an advance payment  
on account in respect of the 
Performance Award Scheme;
(b)   apply sums totalling £20k usually 

used for Christmas cards, 
calendars and diaries to charitable 
donations for Mind, Shelter and 
the Trussell Trust;

(c)   recommence discussions with 
acquisition targets which were  
put on hold in March 2020;

(d)   approve certain capital 

expenditure projects which  
will take effect in 2021; and

(e)   repay sums waived from salaries 
by the Executive as instructed by 
the Remuneration Committee.

The full year 2020 performance 
resulted in sales of £230.0 million,  
a 2.1% increase compared to 2019 
and PBT of £13.0 million compared  
to £11.9 million in 2019. Net bank debt 
at the end of 2020 was £0.5 million 
(2019: £12.7 million).

The key impacts of Covid-19 on our 
business are:

(a)   There continues to be uncertainty 
about the duration of disruption, 
potential for further outbreaks 
and the consequential impact on 
demand levels caused by public 
health measures necessary to 
control the spread of the disease, 
including periods of lockdowns;
(b)   The speed and extent to which 
the economy recovers will 
continue to create fluctuations  
in demand across our customer 
base. Some key market sectors 
may not fully recover for a 
significant period of time;
(c)   The increased move from 

traditional high street retailing  
to online retailing is likely to 
become a more permanent shift  
in consumer demand patterns. 
The Group has seen a significant 
increase in business in 2020  
from online retailers which has 
helped mitigate the reductions 
experienced by manufacturing 
and industrial customers;
(d)   There has been an increase in 
customers placing their orders 
electronically both through our 
web-shop and our Simplicit.e 
electronic trading platform. We 
expect this trend to continue;
(e)   The moves to accommodate 
increased reliance on remote 
working by employees and 
increased online activity;
(f)   The health and wellbeing  

support available to staff has  
been enhanced, particularly  
for those in vulnerable groups;

(g)   The need for a strong and 

continued focus on day to day 
management of working capital, 
including increased diligence over 
customer credit, the conversion  
of trade receivables and managing 
inventory levels in line with changing 
customer demand; and

16   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

(h)   There may be delays and 

difficulties in sourcing inventory 
and raw materials due to the 
disruption of suppliers’ production, 
particularly given the overlay of 
new trading arrangements with 
the EU from 2021.

The Covid-19 pandemic has  
affected a number of our principal 
risks highlighted in the tables on pages 
20 to 23. We have therefore treated 
Covid-19 as an event impacting many 
of our existing risks, rather than as a 
separately defined new risk.

Summary
The response by Macfarlane Group 
to the challenge of Covid-19 has 
been effective:

• 

• 

• 

 Our people have been operating 
in safe conditions both in their 
workplace and when working from 
home. We have worked hard to 
ensure their health and wellbeing;
 The 2020 financial results for the 
Macfarlane Group show a resilient 
performance despite challenging 
conditions. Sales in 2020 
increased by 2.1%. PBT increased 
by £1.1 million compared to 2019 
and Group bank debt reduced by 
£12.2 million to £0.5 million; and
 All our sites remained operational 
and we have maintained our 
service to customers. Our Net 
Promoter Score (’NPS’) in 2020  
at 53 showed an improvement  
on 2019.

The impact of Covid-19 has been a real 
test for Macfarlane Group in 2020. The 
resilience in our performance reflects 
well on the strength of our business 
model, a well-diversified customer 
base operating across a wide range  
of industry sectors, a robust financial 
structure and the quality and 
commitment of our people.

Social distancing sign

 Zoom call in progress

Employee family and friends 
poster competition

Covid -19 compliant  
desk screens 

Miles and Smiles Challenge  
for charity

17

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Finance review

2020 represents the Group’s 
eleventh consecutive year of  
growth in its profit before tax.

Trading review
The Group saw growth in sales of 
2.1% during 2020, mainly driven by 
Packaging Distribution, enhanced by 
profitable contributions from recent 
acquisitions in 2019 and early in 2020. 
Group sales are £230.0 million, an 
increase of £4.8 million from 2019 
(Restated). Profit before tax for  
2020 increased to £13.0 million, an 
increase of £1.1 million from that 
achieved in 2019 (Restated).

Each month our management 
reporting provides the information to 
review the productivity of all locations 
in the Packaging Distribution business 
using performance against benchmark 
metrics as a percentage of sales for 
gross margin, payroll and related 
employment costs, property costs, 
other overheads and net profit.

The resultant net profit by location  
is also compared to the original 
budget and prior year performance.

Our Manufacturing Operations also 
measure relevant operating costs to 
sales ratios and net profit generated.

Restatement due to prior  
period adjustments
As part of the Group’s preparations 
to mitigate Brexit-related risks, the 
Group undertook an exercise to 
review duty and tariff arrangements 
for all imports and exports to and 
from all countries, both within and 
outwith the EU. This review, which 
was completed in December 2020, 
uncovered one product area in the 
Manufacturing Operations segment 
where the Group, in conjunction  
with its customers, had applied  
an incorrect duty code on certain 
exported items. It was confirmed  
that this error had originated in prior 
years. Working with the customers 
concerned, the Group agreed that  
the error should be rectified 
forthwith and all arrears of duty 
including interest, should be paid.

In addition to rectifying the specific 
error identified, the Group undertook 
a further review of all imports and 
exports to confirm that there was no 
risk of any similar instances. This was 
concluded satisfactorily, and no other 
such errors were identified. 

The Group’s share of the estimated 
value of £697,000 after tax has been 
fully provided for at 31 December 
2020 (notes 18 and 21), with 
£534,000 recognised as a prior 
period adjustment being £143,000 
deducted from 2019 sales, £19,000 
added to interest, £31,000 deducted 
from the 2019 tax charge and 
£403,000 relating to earlier years 
recorded as a reduction in Retained 
earnings at 1 January 2019. 

In addition, the Group has previously 
offset certain cash balances against 
bank borrowings which, whilst in line 
with the Group’s legal right of offset, 
did not reflect any short-term 
intention to offset the liabilities after 
the balance sheet dates as required 
by IAS 32. Accordingly, £2,269,000 
has been added to cash balances and 
bank borrowings respectively in 2019 
and there has been no impact on the 
income statement or on net assets. 

Taxation
The tax charge for 2020 was  
£2.8 million on profit before tax of 
£13.0 million, a rate of 21.8%, above 
the prevailing rate of 19.0% mainly 
due to the effect on deferred tax  
of an adjustment in the long-term 
corporation tax rate from 17% to 
19% during 2020 and acquisition 
costs not being deductible for tax 
purposes. This compared with a tax 
charge of £2.3 million on the restated 
2019 profit before tax of £11.9 million, 
a tax rate of 19.1%.

Macfarlane Group and its subsidiary 
companies have no uncertain tax 
treatments with HMRC in the UK.

Earnings per share
Basic and diluted earnings per share 
amounted to 6.45p (2019: Restated 
6.09p) and 6.42p (2019: Restated 
6.07p) respectively, broadly reflective 
of the movement in profitability.  
The calculations take account of  
the dilution caused by the issue  
of LTIP awards.

Dividends
A dividend of 0.70p per share was paid 
on 8 October 2020. A further dividend 
of 1.85p per share is subject to 
approval by shareholders at the AGM 
in May 2021 and is not included as a 
liability in these financial statements.

Dividend cover has been maintained 
at 2.5 times. The Group continues to 
balance the aim to pay an attractive 
level of dividend against the need to 
retain funds in the business to finance 
growth, make the agreed levels of 
pension fund deficit contributions, 
fund acquisitions and meet capital 
expenditure requirements.

Cash flow and net bank debt
The Group’s debt facility with Lloyds 
Banking Group PLC comprises a 
committed borrowing facility of up  
to £30.0 million secured over part of 
Macfarlane Group’s trade receivables 
and at the start of 2021, the term of the 
facility was extended to 31 December 
2025. The facility bears interest at 
normal commercial rates and carries 
standard financial covenants in 
relation to interest cover and levels  
of headroom over trade receivables. 
The Group has been in compliance 
with these covenants throughout 
2020 and 2021 to date.

The facility accommodates increased 
working capital requirements from 
our organic growth as well as finance 
for pension scheme contributions 
and an ability to fund acquisitions. 
Our financing requirements are  
met through cash generation from 
profitable trading as well as by 
maintaining committed borrowing 
facilities for the medium-term.

18   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Group net bank borrowings were  
£0.5 million at 31 December 2020, a 
reduction of £12.2 million from 2019 
as set out in note 22. The Group’s cash 
generation continued to be strong 
enabling us to finance growth, make 
agreed levels of pension contributions, 
fund acquisitions and meet capital 
expenditure requirements. The Group 
spent £2.7 million on acquisitions  
in 2020 (2019: £6.2 million) and  
£0.8 million on capital expenditure  
in 2020 (2019: £2.6 million).

We will continue to invest where 
there are needs or opportunities to 
meet future growth plans. The Group 
will strive to ensure that in 2021, 
profit generation is, at the very 
minimum, matched by cash 
generation. The Group will remain 
prudent in its assessment of the likely 
returns from capital expenditure and 
potential acquisitions.

Acquisitions
On 6 January 2020, the Company’s 
subsidiary, Macfarlane Group UK 
Limited, acquired the business, 
goodwill and selected assets of the 
packaging distribution business of 
Armagrip Limited, based in County 
Durham for a consideration of  
£0.9 million. The net assets acquired 
amounted to £0.7 million.

Deferred consideration of £1.8 million 
was paid in 2020 in relation to the 2019 
acquisitions of Carnweather Limited 
(the immediate parent of the trading 
company Ecopac (U.K.)) and Leyland 
Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited.

Market capitalisation and  
share price movements
The number of shares in issue at  
31 December 2020 was 157,812,000. 
At the year-end the Company’s market 
capitalisation was £138.1 million, 
compared with £170.0 million last year. 
The share price at 31 December 2020 
was 87.50p, compared with 107.75p  
at 31 December 2019. The range of 
transaction prices for Macfarlane 
Group shares during 2020 was  
62.00p to 113.50p for each ordinary 
share of 25p.

Financial instruments
The Group’s principal financial 
instruments comprise bank 
borrowings, cash balances and other 
items, such as trade receivables and 
trade payables that arise directly from 
its operations as well as shareholders’ 
equity and deferred consideration 
arising from acquisitions. The main 
purpose of these financial instruments 
is to provide finance for the Group’s 
operations. It is the Group’s policy 
that no speculative trading in financial 
instruments is undertaken. The main 
risks arising are liquidity risk and 
credit risk and the secondary risks  
are interest rate risk and currency risk. 
The policies for managing these risks, 
which have remained unchanged since 
the beginning of 2020 are set out in 
note 15 to the financial statements.

Pension schemes
The Group’s pension scheme deficit 
at 31 December 2020 was £1.5 million 
(2019: £6.5 million). This is sensitive 
to movements in bond yields, 
inflation, longevity assumptions and 
investment returns. The impact of 
these sensitivities is set out in note 
24 to the financial statements. 

The Board continues to make regular 
deficit reduction contributions each 
year to reduce the deficit. This, 
combined with careful stewardship  
of the investment portfolio by the 
Trustees, in conjunction with the 
Group, has helped match the 
investments with the scheme’s 
liability profile.

Following the triennial actuarial 
valuation of the scheme at 1 May 
2020, the Group agreed a new 
schedule of contributions with the 
Pension Scheme Trustees, which 
assumed a recovery plan period of  
4 years. Annual contributions will 
reduce from the current level of  
£3.1 million to £1.3 million with  
effect from 1 May 2021.

The next triennial actuarial valuation 
will be carried out at 1 May 2023.

The Group operates a number of 
defined contribution arrangements 
for the majority of the employee 
base. Over 750 of our employees  
are members of one of our pension 
scheme arrangements.

International Financial Reporting 
Standards and accounting policies
The Group continues to comply  
with all International Financial 
Reporting Standards adopted  
by the European Union.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration 
of going concern, have reviewed the 
Group’s cash flow forecasts and 
profit projections, which are based  
on the Directors’ past experience  
and their assessment of the current 
market outlook for the business. The 
Group’s business activities together 
with the factors likely to affect its 
future development, performance 
and financial position are set out in 
the Chairman’s Statement and the 
Strategic Report on pages 4 to 35. 
Given the significant disruption and 
economic uncertainty caused by 
Covid-19, the Directors have 
extended their consideration of 
going concern with the review of 
additional scenario analysis as set out 
in the Viability Statement on page 27.

After making enquiries, the Directors 
have a reasonable expectation that 
the Company and the Group have 
adequate resources to continue in 
operational existence for at least the 
next twelve months. For this reason 
they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements.

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

25 February 2021

19

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Principal risks and uncertainties

•  Delays and difficulties sourcing 
inventory and raw materials  
due to disruption of suppliers’ 
production; and

•  Uncertainty regarding the speed 
and extent to which the economy 
and in particular the key market 
sectors relevant to the Group’s 
business and growth, recover.

Accordingly Covid-19 is built into  
our assessment of certain specific 
risks below.

Response to Brexit
A new trading arrangement was 
concluded between the UK and the 
EU in December 2020. Based on our 
earlier impact analysis, this trading 
arrangement should not have a 
significant impact on the Group’s 
supply costs. However, we shall 
continue to monitor and mitigate  
any disruption to our supply chain  
for EU sourced products.

The principal risks and uncertainties 
faced by the Group and the factors 
mitigating these risks are detailed 
on pages 20 to 23. The business 
continues to experience the impact 
of two significant events, the 
Covid-19 pandemic and Brexit.  
The Group’s response to the risks 
and uncertainties created by both 
those events is set out below.

Response to the Covid-19 
pandemic (’Covid-19’)
The Group’s response to Covid-19 has 
focused on the safety and wellbeing  
of our people, protecting our financial 
position and limiting the interruption 
of service to our customers.

Whilst we have not classified Covid-19 
as a separate principal risk due to its 
pervasive effect across all of the 
principal risks and uncertainties shown 
below, specific uncertainties arising 
from the pandemic include:

•  Fluctuations in demand across our 
customer base. Some key market 
sectors may not fully recover for  
a significant period of time;
•  Potential deterioration in cash  
flow of reduced demand from 
customers and recoverability  
of trade receivables;

•  Uncertainty about the duration of 
disruption, the potential for further 
outbreaks and the consequential 
impact on demand levels caused by 
continued public health measures 
necessary to control the spread  
of the disease, including periods  
of lockdowns;

20   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Principal risks and uncertainties
The principal risks and uncertainties 
are detailed on pages 20 to 23. These 
risks are complemented by an overall 
governance framework including 
clear and delegated authorities, 
business performance monitoring 
and appropriate insurance cover  
for a wide range of potential risks. 
There is a dependence on good 
quality local management, which  
is supported by an investment in 
training and development and 
ongoing performance evaluation.

We continue to evolve our risk 
management processes to ensure 
they are robust, effective and 
integrated within our decision-making 
processes. Two additional risks have 
been highlighted in the current year 
partly as a consequence of the 
Covid-19 pandemic, on strategic 
changes to the market generally  
and the increasing potential for 
cyber-security attacks. We have  
also included a brief description of 
how we assess that each risk level has 
changed. For risks shown as 
risk level is broadly similar between 
2020 and 2019. If the risk is shown  
as 
decreased respectively during 2020.

 the risk has increased or 

 the 

There are a number of other risks 
that we manage which are not 
considered key risks. In addition,  
the Group is subject to the impact  
of general economic conditions 
including any economic uncertainty, 
the competitive environment, 
compliance with legislation and risks 
associated with business continuity. 
These are mitigated in ways common 
to all businesses and not specific to 
Macfarlane Group.

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Strategic changes in the market (new risk in 2020)

Failure to respond to strategic 
shifts in the market, including  
the impact of weaknesses in the 
economy as well as disruptive 
behaviour from competitors and 
changing customer needs (e.g. the 
move towards online retail) could 
limit the Group’s ability to continue 
to grow revenues.

•  The Group has a well-diversified customer 

base giving protection from changes in specific 
industry sectors as well as a flexible business 
model and strong value proposition enabling 
it to meet the changing needs of customers.

•  The Group strives to maintain high service 
levels for customers ensuring that customer 
needs are met, despite the reduction in 
contact during 2020. 

•  The Group continues to invest in electronic 
trading platforms, to further enhance its 
service offering.

•  The Group maintains strong partnerships 
with key suppliers, to ensure that a broad 
range of products is available to customers  
to respond to their requirements including 
any changes in their environmental and 
sustainability concerns.

•  The Group’s supply chain in 2020 
has proved resilient and robust 
despite the disruptive impact  
of Covid-19.

•  In 2020 the Group experienced 
weaker demand from customers  
in aerospace, high street retail, 
automotive and a number of other 
industrial sectors. However, this 
has been offset by growth in the 
e-commerce and medical sectors. 

Raw material prices

The Group’s businesses are 
impacted by commodity-based raw 
material prices and manufacturer 
energy costs, with profitability 
sensitive to input price changes 
including currency fluctuations. 
The principal components are 
corrugated paper, polythene films, 
timber and foam, with changes  
to paper and oil prices having a 
direct impact on the price we  
pay to our suppliers.

•  The Group works closely with its supplier  
and customer base to manage effectively  
the scale and timing of these price changes 
and any resultant impact on profit.
•  Our IT systems monitor and measure 

effectiveness in these changes. 
•  Where possible, alternative supplier 

relationships are maintained to minimise 
supplier dependency. 

•  We work with customers to redesign packs 
and reduce packing cost to mitigate the 
impact of cost increases.

Decentralised structure

In Packaging Distribution,  
the business model reflects a 
decentralised approach with a 
dependency on effective local 
decision-making. There is a risk 
that the decentralised management 
control is less effective and local 
decisions may not always meet 
overall corporate objectives.

•  The Group ensures that our staff have the 
right working environment, information  
and sales tools to enable them to meet 
corporate objectives. 

•  A comprehensive management information 
system is maintained with key performance 
indicators monitored and actions taken  
when required.

•  Significant investment has been made in 
2020 and further investment is planned  
in 2021 to provide the technology to our 
employees to work remotely while enhancing 
the quality of communication with fellow 
employees, customers and suppliers.

•  Whilst gross margins have 

remained strong in 2020, with 
increased demand from internet 
retail, recovery of some sectors 
that have experienced reduced 
demand during Covid-19 and 
Brexit stock building, it is 
anticipated that the Group will 
experience inflationary pricing 
pressures in 2021, including 
increased administration costs  
for products sourced from the EU.

•  The implementation of our 

Covid-19 mitigations resulted  
in a high proportion of our 
employees working remotely, 
further increasing pressure  
on local decision-making.

•  Virtual conferencing technology 

has enabled the Group to improve 
the quality, consistency and 
frequency of engagement with 
managers and employees. This 
has contributed to the speed and 
effectiveness of implementing key 
actions during 2020.

21

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Principal risks and uncertainties  
(continued)

Risk description

Property

Given the multi-site nature of its 
business, the Group has a property 
portfolio comprising 3 owned sites 
and 34 leased sites. This portfolio 
gives rise to risks in relation to 
ongoing lease costs, dilapidations 
and fluctuations in value.

Cyber-security (new risk in 2020)

The increasing frequency and 
sophistication of cyber-attacks  
is a risk which potentially threatens 
the confidentiality, integrity and 
availability of the Group’s data and 
IT systems. These attacks could 
also cause reputational damage 
and fines in the event of personal 
data being compromised.

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

•  The Group adopts a proactive approach to 
managing property costs and exposures.
•  Where a site is non-operational the Group 

seeks to assign, sell or sub-lease the building 
to mitigate the financial impact. 

•  If this is not possible, rental voids are  

provided on vacant properties taking into 
consideration the likely period of vacancy  
and incentives to re-let.

•  The Group continually invests in its IT 

infrastructure to protect against cyber-
security threats. This includes regular  
testing of IT Disaster Recovery Plans.
•  We also engage the services of a cyber-
security partner to perform regular 
penetration tests and assess potential 
vulnerabilities within our security 
arrangements.

•  This is complemented by a program  
of cyber-security awareness training  
to ensure that all staff are aware of the 
potential threats caused by deliberate  
and unauthorised attempts to gain access  
to our systems and data.

•  Our property consolidation 

strategy has continued during 2020 
and work is ongoing to finalise exit 
costs on expiry for two long-term 
leases, which had been sub-let  
and known exits from existing 
operating sites. Provisions have 
been established to cover the 
anticipated exit costs (note 21).
•  The Group currently has no vacant 

or sub-let properties.

•  We have increased our reliance on 
remote working which increases 
the number of points from which 
attacks could originate.

•  The frequency and sophistication  
of cyber-attacks generally has 
increased as a result of Covid-19.

Financial liquidity, debt covenants and interest rates

The Group needs continuous 
access to funding to meet its 
trading obligations and to support 
organic growth and acquisitions. 
There is a risk that the Group may 
be unable to obtain funds and that 
such funds will only be available  
on unfavourable terms. 

The Group’s borrowing facility 
comprises a committed facility  
of up to £30 million. This includes 
requirements to comply with 
specified covenants, with a breach 
potentially resulting in Group 
borrowings being subject to 
onerous conditions. 

•  The Group’s borrowing facility comprises a 
committed facility of £30 million with Lloyds 
Bank PLC, which finances our trading 
requirements and supports controlled 
expansion, providing a medium-term  
funding platform for growth.

•  The Group regularly monitors net bank debt 
and forecast cash flows to ensure that it will 
be able to meet its financial obligations as 
they fall due.

•  Compliance with covenants is monitored  
on a monthly basis and sensitivity analysis  
is applied to forecasts to assess the impact 
on covenant compliance.

•  The Group has proved to be strongly 
cash generative in 2020 and has 
operated well within its existing 
bank facilities throughout the year.
•  At the start of 2021, the £30 million 
committed facility with Lloyds 
Banking Group PLC was extended 
until December 2025.

22   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Risk description

Mitigating factors

Change in risk level

Working capital 

The Group has a significant 
investment in working capital in  
the form of trade receivables and 
inventories. There is a risk that this 
investment is not fully recovered.

•  Credit risk is controlled by applying rigour  
to the management of trade receivables by 
our Credit Manager and the credit control 
team and is subject to additional scrutiny 
from the Group Finance Director.

•  Inventory levels and order patterns are 

regularly reviewed and risks arising from 
holding bespoke stocks are managed by 
obtaining order cover from customers.

•  The impact of Covid-19 resulted in 

increased bad debt write-offs in 2020 
with some customers experiencing 
cash flow difficulties. The Expected 
Credit Loss allowance has been 
increased accordingly (note 14).
•  Aged stock over 6 months old has 
increased reflecting the slower 
movement of older bespoke  
stocks particularly to customers 
experiencing reduced demand. 
Provisioning levels have been 
increased accordingly (note 13).

•  The Group has made 12 acquisitions 
since 2014, including one in 2020, all 
of which continue to perform well. 
The Group has well-established due 
diligence and integration processes 
while only acquiring well established 
quality businesses which will 
perform well in the Group.

•  The Group carefully reviews potential 
acquisition targets, ensuring that the  
focus is on high-quality businesses which 
complement the existing Group profile  
and provide opportunities for growth. 

•  Having completed a number of acquisitions in 
recent years, the Group has well-established 
due diligence and integration processes and 
procedures.

•  The Group has a comprehensive management 

information system to enable effective 
monitoring of post-acquisition performance. 

•  Earn-out mechanisms also mitigate risk in 

the post-acquisition period.

•  Goodwill and other intangible assets are 
tested annually for impairment with the 
results set out in note 10.

Acquisitions

The Group’s growth strategy 
includes acquisitions as 
demonstrated in recent years. There 
is a risk that such acquisitions may 
not be available on acceptable terms 
in the future. It is also possible that 
acquisitions will not succeed due to 
the loss of key people or customers 
following acquisition or the acquired 
business not performing at the level 
expected. This could potentially lead 
to an impairment in the carrying 
value of the related goodwill and 
other intangible assets. Execution 
risks around the failure to 
successfully integrate the acquired 
business following conclusion of 
the earn-out period also exist.

Defined benefit pension scheme 

The Group’s defined benefit pension 
scheme is sensitive to a number of 
key factors including investment 
returns, the discount rates used to 
calculate the scheme’s liabilities 
and mortality assumptions. Small 
changes in these assumptions could 
cause significant movements in the 
pension deficit. 

•  The scheme was closed to new members  
in 2002. Benefits for active members were 
amended by freezing pensionable salaries  
at April 2009 levels.

•  A Pension Increase Exchange option is 

available to offer flexibility to new pensioners 
in the current level of pension benefits and 
the rate of future increases.

•  The Group makes Deficit Reduction 

Contributions each year.

•  The investment profile is regularly reviewed  
to ensure continued matching of investments 
with the scheme’s liability profile.

•  The IAS 19 valuation of the Group’s 
defined benefit pension scheme as 
at 31 December 2020 estimated the 
scheme deficit to be £1.5 million, a 
decrease of £5.0 million during 2020. 

•  Deficit repair contributions will 

decrease from £3.1 million in 2020  
to £1.3 million per annum from  
1 May 2021 following the actuarial 
valuation at 1 May 2020. This 
reflects continued progress in 
reducing the deficit.

23

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Stakeholder engagement

The Board and its individual Directors 
consider that they have acted in good 
faith in the manner that is most likely 
to promote the success of Macfarlane 
Group for the benefit of its members 
as a whole and have done so having 
regard to the stakeholders and 
matters set out in Section 172  
of the Companies Act 2006.

There is a recognition by the Directors 
that they are not expected to balance 
the interests of Macfarlane Group 
against those of other stakeholders 
but rather, after considering all 
relevant factors, to decide on the 
actions which will best lead to success 
for the Group having regard to the 
long term. This can mean that  
certain stakeholder Groups may  
be inadvertently adversely affected, 
but this will not of itself call into 
question the decisions made.

The Directors view the key  
Company stakeholders and means  
of engagement as shown in the table 
to the right.

In all cases, the level of engagement 
informs the Board, both in relation  
to stakeholder concerns and the 
likely impact on decision-making 
throughout the year.

We expect our people to act with the 
highest level of integrity in dealing with 
all stakeholders. We operate a suite of 
policies which are intended to ensure 
that Macfarlane Group employees are 
empowered to make decisions locally 
but within a control framework which 
meets Group objectives.

The Board uses its regular meetings as 
a mechanism to address and meet its 
obligations under Section 172 of the 
Companies Act 2006. The following 
narrative covers the key decisions 
made and the Stakeholder Groups 
impacted by these decisions.

Stakeholder  
group

 1   
Shareholders

 2   
Employees

 3   
Pension Trustees

 4   
Customers

 5   
Suppliers

 6  
Our trading 
locations and the 
impact of our  
activities on the  
local environment

Principal methods of engagement

Members of the Board normally engage with shareholders 
throughout the year at events such as the Annual General 
Meeting, the results roadshows and Capital Markets Days. Our 
Chairman also meets with major shareholders each year. Due to 
Covid-19 restrictions virtual meetings were held throughout 2020. 
These meetings gave shareholders a number of opportunities  
to raise concerns and, in particular understand the impact of 
Covid-19 on the Group. Presentations to Shareholders are  
also shared on the www.macfarlanegroup.com website.

The Board normally holds at least four of its meetings at different 
Group locations and this provides the opportunity to engage with 
the local teams and hear their views on working in Macfarlane 
Group. Due to Covid-19 restrictions Board meetings from March 
2020 (7 of 9 meetings in the year) onwards were held virtually and 
employee representatives were invited to those meetings to 
engage with the Board on issues affecting employees including 
Health & Safety, wellbeing, the impact of restructuring, rewards  
and incentives. In addition, Executive Board members have held 
monthly communication meetings with the management teams 
across the Group to provide an update on key issues and discuss 
any concerns.

The Group Finance Director attends all Trustee Board meetings 
of the Macfarlane Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme 
(1974) and works with the Board of Trustees to ensure the 
pension is funded in line with UK pension legislation to meet  
our commitments to the 570 current and former employees  
who are members of this pension arrangement.

Teams at all our locations interact with all our existing and 
potential customers, in the Local, Core and National customer 
groups on a daily basis to understand and fulfil the product and 
service requirements of our customers. The Chief Executive 
Officer has also sent regular communication to customers  
during 2020 to update them on our response to Covid-19  
and reassure them of our support.

Our procurement teams and employees at all our locations 
interact both with our strategic and all other suppliers on a daily 
basis to ensure that the supply chain is robust and that the 
trading relationships with suppliers continue to operate well.

We operate from good quality facilities throughout the UK and 
deliver to customers using our own fleet of trucks, driven by our 
drivers. We act in a manner intended to recognise and reduce  
our impact on our local environments in terms of the types  
of product supplied, usage of energy and CO2 emissions.

24   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

The Board reviewed the proposals  
to restructure the teams in both the 
Packaging Distribution and Packaging 
Design & Manufacture activities 
which resulted in the redundancy  
of 62 employees to ensure it was a 
proportionate and necessary action. 
The Board also confirmed that 
employees were properly engaged  
in the process and this resulted in 54 
of the redundancies in September 
and October 2020 being of a 
voluntary nature.

The Board agreed that the pension 
scheme and all Group Personal 
Pension Plans should continue to  
be properly funded throughout 2020. 

The Board reviewed and approved 
the revised incentive programmes  
for employees which recognised their 
hard work and dedication in difficult 
circumstances. The first incentive 
scheme included a one-off payment 
for operational staff in July 2020 in 
recognition of their commitment in 
continuing to service customers in 
the first lockdown. The second stage 
included approval of a Performance 
Award Scheme in recognition of the 
resilient performance in Packaging 
Distribution and Labels.

Response to Covid-19   1    2    3    4    5    6

The Board reviewed the Covid-19 
response plan in the March 2020  
and April 2020 meetings (outlined  
in the Covid-19 commentary on 
pages 14 to 17).

The Board received regular updates 
on progress in subsequent meetings 
from the Chief Executive, the Finance 
Director and the HR Director with 
particular focus on the health, safety 
and wellbeing of employees, service 
to customers and the Group’s 
financial position. 

The Board concluded as a result of 
the financial updates that there was 
no requirement to seek additional 
funding by increasing the available 
Bank facilities or by seeking additional 
equity from existing shareholders.

The Board approved the cancellation of 
the 2019 final dividend to shareholders 
in March 2020 as one of the initial 
Covid-19 cash conservation measures. 
At the same time the Board agreed 
with its broker to withdraw market 
guidance given the economic 
uncertainty at that stage.

When it became clear that the financial 
impact on the Group was not as severe 
as expected, the Board approved the 
repayment of £4.1 million in respect 
of all government support received 
through both VAT and PAYE/NIC 
deferrals and £1.3 million in respect of 
grants received for furlough payments 
under the Coronavirus Job Retention 
Scheme in the third quarter of 2020.

Following resilient trading from March 
until August 2020, the Board agreed 
to re-instate market guidance and 
approve the recommencement of 
dividends in August 2020 by declaring 
a 2020 interim dividend for payment 
in October 2020.

Strategy and performance
Strategy   1    2    4    5    6

The Board reviews the Group’s 
strategic direction and growth  
plans during each calendar year.

The Board approved the acquisition  
in the Packaging Distribution 
business, concluding that the 
business acquired had a similar 
customer and business approach  
to Macfarlane and would be a good 
strategic fit, which could be readily 
absorbed into the existing network  
of Packaging Distribution sites.

Each year the Board reviews and 
approves Corporate Defence 
documents designed to protect  
the value of Macfarlane Group in the 
event of an unexpected approach.

Performance   1    2    4    5

The Board approves the annual 
budget for the forthcoming year  
at its December meeting.

The Board reviews the trading 
performance of the business 
throughout the year, monitoring 
performance against the agreed 
budget and the previous financial year.

At each meeting the Board receives 
reports from the Chief Executive  
and the Finance Director. These 
reports cover trading performance, 
relationships with key customers  
and suppliers as well as aspects of 
operational performance and the 
impact on our employees. The 
reports also give the Board visibility 
of the up to date trading terms with 
both customers and suppliers.

The activities of our competitors are 
reviewed, along with any potential 
impact on the Group.

25

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Stakeholder engagement  
(continued)

Financing   1    2    3    5    6

Risk   1    2    3    4    5    6

The Board reviews the Company’s 
internal control framework ensuring 
regular updating of the Group and the 
business’s risk registers. In 2020, two 
additional risks were added, partly as  
a response to the Covid-19 pandemic, 
one concerning strategic changes to 
the markets in which we operate and 
one concerning cyber-security.

The Board regularly reviews the 
Group’s risk register, ensuring that 
where appropriate and practical, 
there are appropriate monitoring 
procedures, mitigating controls and 
actions in respect of each major risk. 
This includes a formal consideration 
of emerging risks.

The Board receives a Health and 
Safety status report at every meeting 
as well as an annual presentation 
from the Group’s Health & Safety 
Manager, which covers the impact  
on our employees, our sites and our 
local environment. These reports 
were extended in 2020 to cover the 
Group’s new procedures to ensure 
appropriate social distancing.

The Audit Committee confirms to the 
Board that the Internal Audit Plan has 
been completed and that all internal 
audit reports have been considered 
and action taken where necessary.

Governance and  
legal requirements   1    2

The Board conducts an annual  
review of its effectiveness and  
the effectiveness of the Board 
Committees.

The Board considers current and 
future Board composition, with a focus 
on all forms of diversity and Board 
capability and reviews succession 
planning for both Executive and 
Non-executive Directors to ensure 
orderly succession.

The Board approves the terms and 
conditions attaching to the Group’s 
major banking arrangement and 
receives a monthly report confirming 
compliance with bank covenants.

The Board formally approved the 
terms of the extension of the existing 
Bank facilities to December 2025.

The Board approves the payment  
of dividends to shareholders, taking 
into account distributable reserves 
and likely cash flows and the level  
of dividends relative to other 
financing requirements.

At the conclusion of each triennial 
actuarial valuation of the pension 
scheme deficit, the Board approves the 
contributions being proposed under 
the recovery plan for any deficit. The 
formal schedule of deficit reduction 
contributions, following the conclusion 
of the actuarial valuation at 1 May 2020 
was agreed in February 2021.

The Board approves all location 
moves including property exits as 
well as the terms of new property 
arrangements. In 2020, the principal 
new arrangements related to new 
leases for the Fareham and Horsham 
RDCs and agreeing provisional terms 
for a new lease for the central 
administrative centre in Coventry. 
Each of these leases was for a period 
of ten years, albeit with break clauses 
available for exercise after five years. 
These are all accounted for as lease 
modifications.

The Board considers and approves 
any items of capital expenditure with a 
value in excess of £100k and contracts 
which commit the Group to annual 
operational expenditure in excess of 
£250k. During 2020 the major items 
approved were for a new printing press 
in our Labels business in Kilmarnock 
at a cost of £650k and investment  
in a new Customer Relationship 
Management system with a capital 
expenditure cost of £250k.

Major capital allocation decisions  
are a matter reserved for the Board.

26   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

The Board reviews the Annual 
Report, confirming that in its view, 
the Annual Report is fair, balanced 
and understandable and provides  
the information necessary for 
shareholders to assess the Group’s 
performance, business model and 
strategy.

The Board reviews and satisfies itself 
with all other trading updates, including 
the AGM statement, the half-year 
report and trading update in the final 
quarter, as well as the periodic Covid-19 
trading updates issued in 2020.

The Board accepted the Audit 
Committee’s recommendation to 
re-appoint Deloitte LLP as external 
auditor in 2020.

Culture and organisation   1    2

The Board seeks to satisfy itself that 
the Group’s policies and practices  
for staff are consistent with the 
Company’s values and are designed 
to promote the long-term success  
of the Group.

The Remuneration Committee reviews 
the remuneration packages for the 
Executive Directors and the Chief 
Executive’s key reports each year.

The Board reviews annual pay 
increases for Executive Directors 
each year, ensuring these are 
consistent with the wider employee 
Group, ensuring that these are 
appropriate and consistent.

The Board approved the introduction 
of the Performance Award Scheme in 
the final quarter of 2020 following the 
cancellation of the existing reward 
schemes earlier in the year.

The Board reviews and approves the 
Group’s Gender Pay reports each year.

The Board receives a report from the 
HR Director each year covering key 
employee matters and developments. 
This report covers the results of our 
annual employee survey.

Viability statement

The Board is required to formally 
assess that the Group has adequate 
resources to continue in operational 
existence for the foreseeable future 
and as such can continue to adopt the 
going concern basis of accounting. 
The Board is also required to state 
that it has a reasonable expectation 
that the Group will continue in 
operation and meet its longer-term 
liabilities as they fall due.

To support this statement, the Board 
is required to consider the Group’s 
current financial position, its strategy, 
the market outlook and its principal 
risks. The Board’s assessment of the 
principal risks facing the Group and 
how these risks affect the Group’s 
prospects are set out on pages 20  
to 23. The review also includes 
consideration of how these risks 
could prevent the Group from 
achieving its strategic plan and the 
potential impact these risks could 
have on the Group’s business model, 
future performance, solvency and 
liquidity over the next three years.

The Board considers the Group’s 
viability as part of its ongoing 
programme to manage risk. Each year 
the Board reviews the Group’s strategic 
plan for the forthcoming three-year 
period and challenges the Executive 
team on the plan’s risks. The plan 
reflects the Group’s businesses, which 
have a broad spread of customers 
across a range of different sectors with 
some longer-term contracts in place. 
The assessment period of three years 
is consistent with the Board’s review 
of the Group strategy, including 
assumptions around future growth 
rates for our business and acceptable 
levels of performance.

Financial modelling and scenarios
The Group’s existing bank facilities 
comprise a £30 million committed 
facility with Lloyds Banking Group, 
which is available until December 
2025. The Group has performed well 
during 2020, despite a number of 
local, regional and national lockdowns 
as a consequence of the Covid-19 
pandemic, which gives confidence  
in the strength of the underlying 
business model. The Directors have 
also considered the longer-term 
economic outlook for the UK, 
including the potential impact of  
a prolonged recession, given the 
uncertain economic environment. 
Given the current uncertainty of  
the economic outlook due to the 
Covid-19 pandemic, we have 
modelled a ’severe but plausible 
downside’ scenario as described 
below. In forming conclusions, the 
Directors have also considered 
potential mitigating actions that the 
Group could take to preserve liquidity 
and ensure compliance with its 
financial covenants.

A detailed financial model covering a 
three-year period is maintained and 
regularly updated. This model enables 
sensitivity analysis, which includes 
flexing the main assumptions, including 
future revenue growth, gross margins, 
operating costs, finance costs and 
working capital management. The 
results of flexing these assumptions, 
both individually and in aggregate, are 
used to determine whether additional 
bank facilities will be required during 
the three-year period and whether 
the Group will remain in compliance 
with the covenants relating to the 
current facility.

We have modelled a range of 
scenarios, including a central case,  
a downside scenario, a severe but 
plausible downside and a reverse 
stress test, over the three-year 
horizon. The ’severe but plausible 
downside’ scenario is conservative  
in assuming compared to the central 
case revenue reductions of 5% and 
gross margin reductions at the rate 

of 2% in each of the three years, with 
no reduction in costs. Even under this 
scenario, and before reflecting any 
mitigating actions available to Group 
management, the Group would 
forecast compliance with all financial 
covenants throughout the period  
and would not require any additional 
sources of financing.

As a result of the uncertainties due  
to the Covid-19 pandemic, the Group 
has also modelled a reverse stress 
test scenario. This models the decline 
in sales that the Group would be able 
to absorb before breaching any 
financial covenants. Such a scenario, 
and the sequence of events that 
could lead to it, is considered to be 
remote, as it requires sales reductions 
of c.12.5% per annum between 2021 
and 2023 compared to the central 
case before there is a breach in 
financial covenants in the period 
under review and is calculated before 
reflecting any mitigating actions.

Even in the severe but plausible 
scenario, Macfarlane Group is forecast 
to have sufficient liquidity to continue 
trading, comfortably meeting its 
financial covenants and operating 
within the level of its facilities for the 
foreseeable future. The reverse stress 
test modelling has shown that a c.24% 
reduction in sales in 2021 compared 
to 2020 could lead to a breach of 
covenants in the period under review. 
However, in this scenario, management 
would also be able to take mitigating 
actions similar to those outlined in 
our Covid-19 update on financial 
management on page 15.

Conclusions
For this reason, the Board considers  
it appropriate for the Group to adopt 
the going concern basis in preparing 
its financial statements. 

The Board also has a reasonable 
expectation that the Group will 
continue in operation and meet its 
longer-term liabilities as they fall due.

27

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate responsibility

Introduction

Macfarlane Group puts Corporate 
Responsibility (’CR’) at the forefront 
of its business strategy. Only with 
sustainable growth – including reducing 
our carbon footprint and contributing 
to the lives of our employees and local 
communities – can the business 
continue to flourish. This includes 
providing our employees with a safe 
working environment where they can 
excel; as well as working closely with our 
customers and suppliers to improve 
the sustainability of their packaging 
products and processes. As the largest 
distributor of protective packaging in 
the UK, we are in a privileged position 
to improve sustainability through 
reducing waste, promoting recycling 
and providing our customers with a 
range of options to reduce their 
impact on the environment. 

How we manage CR
The Group has a dedicated CR 
committee, chaired by the HR 
Director. The committee meets 
quarterly and reports to the Board  
on its progress against agreed CR 
objectives during the year. 

The key objectives of the CR 
Committee are: 

•  To improve the awareness of  

CR across the Group;

•  To develop and implement action 

plans that support the CR strategy;
•  To ensure that CR is an integral part 
of daily operational activities; and

•  To monitor and report on CR 

performance using agreed key 
performance indicators.

Our approach can be split into  
the following categories, with the 
performance of each in 2020 set  
out below. 

1. 

 Our people, culture  
and the community

2.  The environment
3. 

 Our business, customers  
and products

Our people, culture  
and the community

Macfarlane Group is committed to its 
people and we recognise our staff are 
our greatest asset, being critical to 
not only the growth of our business, 
but its resilience in challenging times.

Effective, meaningful and timely 
communication has always been 
recognised as fundamental to positive 
employee engagement. The need for 
effective communication has never 
been more crucial than during the past 
year, ensuring that each employee 
has the tools and support needed  
to effectively fulfil their role.

The health, safety and wellbeing  
of our people has never been more 
important. In the current climate it is 
essential that we create a supportive, 
safe and rewarding work environment 
that enables employees to continue 
to deliver our goals and develop  
their careers.

Employee development
Macfarlane Group is dedicated to 
creating a culture where everyone 
has the opportunity to not only excel 
in their current role but reach their  
full potential. Through a variety of 
development methods employees 
have the ability to enhance their 
current skills, gain new ones and 
develop their knowledge.

The apprenticeship schemes continue 
to be a success, with structured 
programmes in place across a 
number of business disciplines.  
Once participants have successfully 
completed their programme the 
objective is for them to be retained 
within the business, moving onto  
the next stage of their career.

providing them with an opportunity 
to improve their skills and knowledge. 
They are assessed regularly on how 
they are implementing the key learnings 
from the programme into their daily 
working life. The success of this 
programme has been demonstrated 
by the career development of many 
of the participants into senior 
management roles.

Whilst the pandemic has impacted 
upon Macfarlane Group’s ability to 
provide face to face training a number 
of externally and internally sourced 
training courses, facilitated through 
various virtual platforms have been 
provided. In addition to the standard 
development programmes, increased 
focused on mental health, effective 
communication and IT skills within the 
virtual world have been made available 
to all employees. The Group has 
provided on average 10 hours 
recorded training per employee.  
As many support courses were 
provided to all staff and their families  
a number of training hours have not 
been formally recorded in 2020. 

The business has continued to 
support and sponsor a number of 
further education programmes and 
professional qualifications including 
the Chartered Institute of 
Procurement and Supply.

Employee engagement
Employee engagement is key to 
motivating the Group’s employees, 
promoting a team ethos and working 
together to deliver outstanding 
customer experience. We have 
maintained traditional methods of 
engagement, however, we have also 
enhanced the volume and variety  
of communication tools given the 
current remote and socially distanced 
working environment.

The Macfarlane Leadership 
Programme remains key in ensuring the 
Company has a robust pipeline of future 
leadership talent in place. Through  
a structured training programme, 
based on theory and practical learning 
methods, talented employees looking 
for progression to senior management 
attend a series of leadership days 

Ensuring employee involvement 
through a broad range of 
communication channels, including 
virtual meetings, business update 
sessions, functional forums and 
written correspondence has proved 
critical in ensuring flexibility of 
approach and ability for the Group  
to react to changing challenges.

28   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Employees took part in surveys  
during 2020, the feedback  
confirming that individuals felt the 
level of communication was right  
and also that they remained positive 
and had adjusted well to the new 
ways of working.

Company policy supports equal 
opportunities and the employment 
and development of individuals with 
disabilities where their disabilities do 
not hinder the performance of their 
duties. Proactive adjustments are 
made to the working environment 
where required.

Employee wellbeing
Employee wellbeing has always been 
important, the Group aims to support 
employees in creating a positive 
feeling of well-being both inside and 
outside of the workplace. Guides, 
support tools and online training have 
been made available to all employees 
with the aim of creating a healthy, 
supportive working environment.

As a Group we understand how 
important a healthy home life is to  
an individual’s wellbeing. The Group’s 
support structures have been 
extended to direct family members, 
with extended flexible working 
practices being adopted to support 
the ability of employees to manage 
the demands of both work and  
home priorities.

Diversity 
The gender breakdown of Directors, 
Senior Managers and other Group 
employees at the year-end is  
shown in Table 1 below:

Gender Pay Gap
Macfarlane Group Gender Pay Gap 
information can be found on our 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com).

This showed men’s mean hourly rate 
to be 7.2% higher than women’s and 
women’s median hourly rate to be 
12.9% higher than men’s. The median 
pay gap in favour of women is 
reflective of our sales function being 
predominantly female, while the 
lower earning band of employees  
in production and logistics is 
predominantly male. These results 
do however change when reviewing 
the mean pay gap information. This  
is reflective of the demographics of 
the Senior Executive team and those 
printers (typically male) employed  
in Macfarlane Labels as skilled 
professionals, who receive 
competitive basic pay and a full  
shift system, offering a significant 
uplift on standard hourly rates.

Human rights
Macfarlane Group does not have  
a specific human rights policy at 
present but it does have other 
policies, which reflect established 
human rights’ principles. These are:

•  Equality – Macfarlane Group is 
committed to providing equal 
opportunities in employment and 
to avoiding unlawful discrimination 
in recruitment, employment or  
to its customers and suppliers. 
Striving to ensure that the work 
environment is free of harassment 
and bullying and that everyone is 
treated with dignity and respect is 
an important aspect of ensuring 
equal opportunities in employment 
and there is a specific dignity at 
work policy, which deals with these 

issues. Where an employee 
becomes disabled every effort  
is made to ensure that their 
employment with the Group 
continues and that appropriate 
adjustments are made. Disabled 
employees receive equal 
opportunities regarding selection 
for training, career development 
and promotion.

•  Engagement – the Group 

recognises the importance of 
meaningful communication and 
consultation in maintaining good 
employee relations. This is achieved 
through formal and informal 
meetings across all business units.

•  Anti-bribery and corruption –  
the Group has an anti-bribery  
and corruption policy, which is 
supplemented by a gift register and 
an associated policy on accepting 
gifts. This was externally reviewed 
in 2020.

•  Whistleblowing policy – there is 

provision for employees to use an 
independent service if they are not 
comfortable speaking to anyone 
within the Group with regard to any 
matters which give them concern. 
This service is promoted throughout 
the Group.

•  Modern Slavery Act – the Group 

has now made a statement under 
the Modern Slavery Act which is 
supported by internal procedures 
to ensure that the principles of the 
act are adhered to. The statement 
is available on the website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

No material breaches of the above 
policies were noted during 2020,  
nor were any matters of significant 
concern reported through our 
whistleblowing service.

Table 1: Diversity

Directors
Senior Managers
All other employees

2020

2019

Female

1
5
285

Male

6
11
547

Female

1
5
320

Male

5
12
575

29

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate responsibility  
(continued)

Health and safety: Covid-19
We conducted risk assessments on all sites to determine the risk  
of spread of Covid-19. The methodology used was as follows:

•  Ensure employees working at home where possible;
•  Temperature testing of all staff and visitors who enter one of our sites;
•  Maintaining 2-metre social distancing guidelines/installing screens 

between work stations at all sites;

•  Mandatory face coverings for all employees when not at their  

work station or desk;

•  Introduce one way systems on stair cases and in corridors, where possible;
•  Enhanced cleaning regimes including all touch points and ’fogging’, with 

detergent, all communal spaces;

•  Strict controls on visitors and contractors coming onto our sites; and
•  Regularly updated signage to remind employees and visitors of site  

rules and help prevent complacency.

Health and Safety
The health, safety and wellbeing of our 
employees, customers and suppliers, 
forms a critical part of the Group’s 
business objectives. We aim to 
achieve a positive health and safety 
culture through the creation of a  
safe and healthy work environment, 
preventing and minimising risks. Our 
vision and goals for Health and Safety 
and how we commit to achieve  
them are based upon best practice 
guidelines, issued by the Health  
and Safety Executive. To ensure we 
adhere and abide by best health and 
safety practices we have dedicated 
Health and Safety Managers in the 
Group, who work with local health and 
safety teams to ensure knowledge 
and standards are effectively applied 
on a consistent basis throughout all 
the health and safety disciplines.

We continue to invest in our premises 
and our equipment to improve the 
safety of our operations, particularly 
in relation to machinery and vehicles.

Aside from the Group’s response to 
Covid-19, in 2020 we also delivered:

•  new working from home guidance 

and risk assessments were 
conducted;

•  a substantial increase in reporting 
of Positive Safety Observations, 
introduced in 2019 to encourage 
sharing of good practice across  
the Group.

•  enhanced health policies covering 
Legionella, Noise, Asbestos etc.; and

•  integration of acquisitions into  
the Group’s Health and Safety 
management systems. 

Seven reportable incidents occurred 
in 2020 compared to four in 2019. All 
reportable incidents are investigated 
by our Health and Safety team and 
changes to working practices 
implemented if required. We also 
ensure that training in a particular 
area where incidents have arisen  
is reinforced.

Table 2: Accident Frequency Rate (AFR)

Business segment

2020

2019

2018

2017

2016

Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Group 

0.18
1.17

0.45

0.15
0.43

0.23

0.48
1.20

0.73

0.53
0.22

0.43

0.42
1.11

0.64

30   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Slips, trips and falls and cuts to  
hands remain the highest cause of 
reportable incidents and we continue 
to review and improve our training 
and oversight of these activities as 
part of our ongoing commitment  
to the safety of our people.

The Accident Frequency Rate  
(’AFR’) representing the number of 
reportable incidents per 100,000 
man-hours worked is shown in  
Table 2 below.

To ensure constant and consistent 
focus regarding Health and Safety 
throughout the Group, it is a main 
agenda item at all formal monthly 
review meetings and operating sites 
in the Group are internally assessed 
and graded on their Health and 
Safety performance.

The Group Board plays a key role  
in overseeing the operation of all 
Health and Safety, reviewing reports 
on Health and Safety at each 
meeting. This report covers  
incidents, near misses, reportable  
and non-reportable incidents.

In 2021, our aim is to continue the 
journey towards zero harm by raising 
our standards and expectations.  
This includes driving a positive  
safety culture throughout the Group 
using continuous improvement 
methodology. We aim to drive  
this process through: 

•  Introduction of Health and Safety 
Management System software to 
improve ownership, traceability, 
compliance, standardisation and 
reporting; 

•  Encouraging and promoting good 

working practices;

•  Accident investigation and root 

cause training;

•  Analysis of all incidents, accidents 
and high potential near misses; and

•  Continued increase in number of 
Directors Safety Checks being 
conducted. 

independent consultant, EcoAct. The 
validity, accuracy and completeness 
of the data was audited by EcoAct and 
then used to calculate the GHG for 
Macfarlane Group. Calculations were 
completed in accordance with the main 
requirements of ISO-14064-1:2006 
standard and deliver both absolute 
values and an intensity ratio for 
Macfarlane Group’s emissions. The 
acquisition of Armagrip completed 
during 2020 has been included in 
GHG reporting and an assumption 
has been made regarding usage 
based on equivalent Group sites.

Macfarlane Group uses total turnover 
(£000) in the reporting period to 
calculate the intensity ratio, as this 
allows emissions to be monitored over 
time taking into account changes  
in the size of the Group. This factor 
was chosen because it provides the 
greatest degree of accuracy and is the 
metric best aligned to business growth.

The results in Tables 3, 4 and 5 show 
that total gross GHG emissions in the 
period were 6,786 tonnes of CO2e, 
(2019: 6,752 tonnes).

72% of emissions came from diesel, 
21% from electricity, and 7% from 
natural gas.

Macfarlane Group’s overall footprint 
increased 0.5% from 6,752 tonnes to 
6,786 tonnes. The intensity calculation 
for 2020 reflects the work completed 
with a reduction in emissions based 
on turnover from 0.0300 to 0.0295.

This is predominantly due to 
decreasing electricity emission 
factors caused by decarbonisation  
of the national grids of the UK and 
Ireland has also been significant.

Emissions from natural gas 
consumption decreased by 1%  
at least partly due to a warm  
2019/20 winter.

Emissions from diesel flexed broadly in 
line with activity, largely driven by a shift 
to diesel reclaims, but also to a lesser 
extent by a slight material increase in 
usage of petrol hybrid vehicles.

Our policy of leasing the vast majority 
of our premises allows us to vary our 
property footprint to ensure the 
maximum efficiency of our operations, 
thereby minimising the impact on  
the environment.

The environment

Environmental care
Macfarlane Group is committed  
to sustainable business practice, 
through ensuring our logistics 
operations run as efficiently as 
possible. We endeavour to reduce the 
carbon footprint of our operations, as 
well as reduce waste through effective 
recycling. Through our Nottingham 
Recycling business, we make it more 
convenient for our local packaging 
customers to recycle their used 
cardboard – contributing to the  
local recycling network.

Mandatory Greenhouse  
Gas Reporting 2020 
Macfarlane Group seeks to minimise 
the impact of our operations on the 
environment and is committed to 
reducing its greenhouse gas (’GHG’) 
emissions. This report outlines 
Macfarlane Group’s GHG emissions for 
2020. Using an operational approach, 
the Group identified its boundaries  
to ensure all activities and facilities 
for which it is responsible were being 
recorded and reported in line with 
Scope 1 and 2 of the Mandatory 
Greenhouse Gas Reporting regulation. 
Relevant data was provided to an 

Table 3: Type of emissions

Type of emissions

Activity

Direct (Scope 1)

Natural gas (kWh)
Vehicle fuel (litres)
Other

Sub-total

2020 
Units

2019 
Units

2,442,273
1,850,967
86,721

2,435,349
1,822,058
23,512

Indirect (Scope 2)

Purchased electricity (kWh)

5,968,628

5,360,779

Sub-total

Total gross emissions (tCO2e)

Table 4: Intensity ratio

Total gross GHG emissions (tCO2e)

Total sales (£000)

Carbon intensity (tCO2e/£000)

2020 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

449
4,785
161

5,395

1,391

1,391

6,786

2019 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

448
4,718
146

5,312

1,440

1,440

6,752

2020 

2019

6,786

6,752

230,029

225,246

0.0295

0.0300

31

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate responsibility  
(continued)

Given the growth of the business, 
continued reductions in the overall 
Gross tCO2e/Sales result will be a 
challenging target, however the 
Group is committed to see a further 
year on year reduction in 2021.

Taskforce on Climate-related 
Financial Disclosures (TCFD)
Macfarlane Group supports the 
recommendations of the Financial 
Stability Board’s TCFD and continues 
to make progress in our consideration 
and response to the issue of climate 
change.

The Board considers climate change 
risk as part of its risk management 
oversight. Areas where climate related 
risks could impact the business 
include increased raw material prices, 
increased business interruption and/
or reduced economic activity due to 
the increased frequency of extreme 
weather incidents.

Climate related risks and opportunities 
are an integral part of the Macfarlane 
Group strategy as we seek to provide 
our customers with the information 
and options to allow them to make 
better informed decisions about the 
impact of our products and services 
on the environment. Packaging is  
an essential commodity for many 
businesses, but it is important to 
consider ways to minimise the impact 
that packaging can have on the 
environment, without compromising 
on product protection.

Further information can  
be found on our website at  
www.macfarlanegroup.com/
corporate-responsibility/
environment.

Table 5: Business segment

Business segment

Packaging Distribution
Manufacturing Operations

Total 

Our goal to achieve a ’zero to landfill’ 
status in 2020 was very close with all 
businesses across the Group achieving 
over 99.2% of waste diverted from 
landfill. The levels of waste segregated 
on site increased to 83% (2019: 73%). 

Our Labels division, through recycling 
86 tonnes (2019: 50 tonnes) of 
paper-based backing product as part 
of their waste reduction programme, 
achieved 98.3% (2019: 99.9%) waste 
diverted from landfill.

The chart on the previous page 
(Table 6) demonstrates significant 
improvements in the recycling and 
recovery rate figures in the last  
ten years.

Further achievements in 2020 are: 

•  The majority of the Groups sites 
now purchase electricity through 
renewable sources. 

•  Twelve of our sites are now 

registered as FSC® accredited, 
facilitating the procurement  
and distribution of sustainably 
sourced products.

The assessment of climate related 
risks and opportunities is an ongoing 
area of focus for the Group and further 
work is planned to fully understand 
the impact of climate change on our 
business and to ensure that we have 
the appropriate mitigation in place  
to mitigate these risks.

Waste management 
The Group’s overall waste tonnages 
decreased despite additional sales 
and a further acquisition, maintaining 
our waste management objectives to 
deliver a high recycling and recovery 
rate. This has been achieved during 
2020 with support from Reconomy 
initially and then by Footprint 
Recycling, our new waste 
management services provider, during 
the year. We have been able to carry 
out more site audits at our facilities, 
local toolbox talks, and provide reports 
to help manage waste streams and 
costs together with implementing 
continuous improvement 
programmes in monitoring waste 
volumes and increasing segregations 
of waste streams. Not all of our sites 
were supported by Reconomy and 
Footprint Recycling in 2020 and 
therefore assumptions have been 
made in the collection of certain data. 

Table 6: Recycling and recovery rate

100%
95%
90%
85%
80%
75%
70%
65%
60%
55%
50%

Percentage 
recycling and 
recovery 
(diversion from 
landfill) per year

2009 2010

2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017

2018

2019

2020

2020 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

5,185
1,601

6,786

2019 
Tonnes 
of CO2e

5,412
1,340

6,752

2020
Sales 
£000

2019
Sales 
£000

2020
tCO2e/£000

2019
tCO2e/£000

201,739
28,290

230,029

196,706
28,540

225,246

0.0257
0.0566

0.0295

0.0275
0.0470

0.0300

32   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Our key environmental objectives  
for 2021 include:

•  Continuous review and appraisals 
of all sites every quarter with a view 
to making efficiencies;

•  Consider options for capital 

expenditure to improve efficiency  
in the Group’s recovery and 
recycling activities, taking into 
account the findings from our 
Energy Savings Opportunity 
Scheme (’ESOS’) report;

•  Incorporate all new sites under the 
Group waste contract therefore 
ensuring compliance, regular 
reviews and appraisals to support 
the overall Group targets;

•  Continuation of our programme to 
introduce LED lighting throughout 
our sites;

•  Deliver savings through the 

Manufacturing Waste Reduction 
Programme;

•  Transition plan to register recent 
acquisitions to BSI ISO 14001 
Environmental Management 
Standard; and

•  Increasing the number of RDCs 

capable of selling products which 
are FSC certified as coming from 
sustainable sources.

Our business, customers  
and products

The Group works in partnership with its 
customers and suppliers to ensure that 
we provide an expert, independent 
and tailored approach, which takes 
into consideration the impact which 
the products and services we provide 
have on the environment.

Our customers
Our Innovation Lab (’iLab’) continues 
to develop environmentally friendly 
solutions for customers. There we can 
stress test packaging products to offer 
greater performance, with reduced 
materials. This includes optimising 
packaging solutions that minimise 
space, resulting in transport and 
storage savings for our customers, 
also enabling them to reduce their 
carbon footprint. 

With future taxes on plastics,  
we can design bespoke products  
that minimises the cost to our 
customer and provides them more 
environmentally friendly options. This 
allows us to save the customers money 
on their packaging operations, whilst 
also making them more sustainable.

The Group continues to make 
progress in its performance against 
the identified CR objectives. During 
2021, the CR Committee will continue 
to review environmental performance, 
actively supporting methods or 
practices that contribute to the 
continued development of a culture 
driven by environmental responsibility.

Our customers and Covid-19
We have helped our customers adapt 
to the new business environment 
caused by Covid-19. This included:

•  Increasing usage of our online 
trading platform Simplicit.e;

•  Helping customers in certain sectors 
adapt their packaging requirements 
and processes to adjust for additional 
demand during the pandemic; and

•  Providing customers with ’virtual 
tours’ of our Innovation Lab, to  
help them continue to benefit  
from the design and testing of 
bespoke products.

Customer feedback 
To continually improve service to  
our customers, we use a range of 
metrics to evaluate our performance 
on an annual basis. In Packaging 
Distribution, we gain regular feedback 
from our customers through Net 
Promoter Score (NPS) Surveys,  
an Annual Customer Satisfaction 
Survey (Table 7), and online Trust 
Pilot reviews. This feedback is then 
used to improve products, processes 
and systems that interact with our 
customers. We also survey customers 
in all of our businesses annually, to 
evaluate our performance against  
a range of key service metrics.

Sales order management
Our online customer order 
management and e-trading  
system, Simplicit.e, and  
shop.macfarlanepackaging.com  
are contributing to improvements  
in productivity as well as meeting  
the needs of our customers requiring 
more visibility of their packaging 
management. In Packaging 
Distribution in 2020, the percentage 
of order lines transacted online 
increased to 27% (2019: 23%).

Table 7: Annual customer satisfaction scores

Packaging Distribution
Packaging Design and Manufacture
Labels 

2020

91%
96%
87%

2019

93%
85%
91%

33

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Helping our customers benefit 
from the Significant Six

Our customers’ products  
must arrive in perfect condition, 
on time, in a cost efficient and 
sustainable manner.

At Macfarlane Packaging, we have spent decades 
innovating and perfecting packaging solutions for a wide 
range of markets that are strong, efficient and sustainable. 
In doing so, we have isolated six hidden costs that have the 
biggest impact on most packaging operations… we call 
these costs ‘The Significant Six’ and they can account  
for 90% of all costs in a packaging operation.

Storage costs

1.
With over 700,000 sq ft of 
warehouse space and a fleet of over 
100 vehicles, our nationwide RDCs 
mean that customers’ packaging 
stock levels can be minimised.

Productivity costs

2.
We can review the end-to-end 
customer pack operation to identify 
space, time and process efficiencies 
to aid productivity at all stages.

Administration costs

3. 
As the UK’s biggest packaging 
supplier we can provide insight to 
enable our customers to reduce 
the costs associated with  
managing multiple suppliers.

Customer experience

4. 
Macfarlane can help enhance the 
consumer experience of packaging 
form and brand but at the same 
time be mindful of cost implications. 

Transport costs

5. 
By re-thinking the pack design, 
significant reductions in storage,  
postal and courier charges can be 
achieved, whilst improving product 
protection at the same time.

Damages and returns

6. 
By challenging areas in the customer 
supply chain where there are 
damages and returns, we can find the 
right packaging solution to protect 
the product and the brand too.

34   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
Corporate responsibility  
(continued)

These objectives are monitored by  
an internal independent audit process 
providing visibility of a site’s operational 
activities and its adherence to 
legislative or Company requirements. 
Environmental information is 
recorded, reviewed and analysed,  
by our procurement teams to ensure 
compliance with the Company’s  
legal obligations and achievement  
of internal objectives and targets.

Registration to ISO 14001 
With the exception of 9 sites, all our 
UK packaging sites are registered  
to BSI ISO 14001 Environmental 
Management Standard. It is planned 
to have all sites registered by 2025. 
As an internationally recognised 
standard on environmental 
management, registration involves  
a process of continual assessment  
of our environmental standards and 
processes. A key objective in 2021 is to 
develop a transition plan to register 
recent acquisitions under the standard.

Electronic documentation
In 2020, 94% (2019: 91%) of invoices  
to our customers were delivered 
electronically, further reducing paper 
usage. The Group continues to 
encourage customers to receive 
documentation electronically.

Our suppliers
The Group has long established 
relationships with our supply chain 
partners primarily in the UK but also  
in Europe and the Far East. Through 
these trusted partnerships we can 
work closely with suppliers to 
promote sustainable business 
practices and supply more 
environmentally friendly products.

One approach we take to achieve this 
is by using an Environmental Product 
Matrix, produced in conjunction with 
our suppliers, which is consistent  
with the underlying need to ensure 
products are effectively protected  
in storage and transit. This Matrix 
enables our customers to choose 
packaging, which is fit for purpose, 
whilst ensuring they still embrace the 
Reduce, Re-use, and Recycle ethos.

To support our ongoing commitment 
to improve our environmental 
performance, we pursue the 
following objectives:

•  Ensure compliance with all 
applicable environmental 
legislation and regulations;
•  Reduce emissions’ pollution;
•  Improve waste management 

practices;

•  Reduce the consumption of  

natural resources;

•  Minimise noise and other 

nuisances; and

•  Continuously assess our 

environmental performance.

35

Retail customer:
Halfords
Halfords challenged Macfarlane 
Packaging to redesign a range  
of bike boxes for the Halfords 
children’s Christmas bike range.

The existing boxes for smaller 
children’s bikes, featuring wide  
stunt pegs and stabilisers, had 
empty spaces inside that had  
to be filled with plastic to protect 
them during transportation. 

However, with Halfords looking to 
reduce levels of plastic packaging  
to help protect the environment, 
MacFarlane used the ‘Significant  
Six’ to optimise the designs for 
performance and sustainability and 
designed four bespoke sized boxes 
with three inserts for packaging 
across 90 bike models.

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Board of Directors

Stuart Paterson
Chairman
Stuart joined the Board on 1 January 2013 
as a Non-executive Director, becoming 
Chairman on 29 September 2017. He is 
a Chartered Accountant and was Chief 
Financial Officer at Forth Ports Limited 
until he retired in January 2018. He joined 
Forth Ports in March 2011 when it was 
listed on the London Stock Exchange and 
the company was subsequently acquired 
by Arcus Infrastructure Partners in 2011. 
Prior to this role, Stuart was Chief 
Financial Officer of Johnston Press PLC 
from 2001 to 2010 and previously worked 
in senior financial management roles at 
Motorola Corporation, and as Group 
Finance Director and then Managing 
Director Europe for Aggreko PLC. 
Stuart joined Angel Trains Group 
Limited as a non-executive Director in 
September 2019 and chairs the Audit & 
Risk Committee. He is also a trustee of 
the Royal Yacht Britannia and a member 
of their Audit, Risk and Remuneration 
Committees. He also served as a 
non-executive Director with Devro PLC 
from 2006 to 2012, chairing the Audit 
Committee. He chairs the Nominations 
Committee and is a member of the 
Remuneration Committee.

Peter Atkinson
Chief Executive
Peter joined Macfarlane Group as Chief 
Executive in October 2003. He has a 
strong sales and marketing background 
through his career at Procter & Gamble 
and S.C. Johnson. Peter also has 
significant general management 
experience gained during his time at 
GKN PLC and its joint venture partners 
where he worked from 1988 to 2001 in a 
number of senior executive roles in their 
business-to-business operations. He 
has a successful track record of both 
business turnarounds and business 
development with extensive exposure 
to international business, having worked 
in the UK, Europe and the USA.

Ivor Gray
Finance Director 
Ivor is a member of The Institute of 
Chartered Accountants of Scotland  
and has been with the Group since 1996. 
He was appointed as a Director on  
19 November 2020 and became Finance 
Director on 1 January 2021. Ivor has been 
on the Executive Committee since 2005 
and was the Group’s Company Secretary 
from 15 May 2020 to 31 December 2020. 
He was with KPMG LLP for six years before 
joining Macfarlane Group in 1996.

John Love
Executive Director 
John is a member of The Institute of 
Chartered Accountants of Scotland and 
has been with the Group for twenty-four 
years and was appointed Finance Director 
on 12 July 1999. He was with Deloitte and 
its predecessor firms for sixteen years 
before joining Macfarlane Group in 1996. 
He stepped down as Finance Director  
on 31 December 2020 and retires from 
the Board and Macfarlane Group on  
31 March 2021.

Bob McLellan
Non-executive Director and  
Senior Independent Director
Bob joined the Board on 5 March 2013. He 
was Chief Executive of DS Smith Packaging 
UK until 2011, latterly as Deputy CEO 
Packaging (UK and Continental Europe). 
Bob has spent many years working in the 
packaging sector and has held leading 
roles in both the UK and Continental 
Europe for industry employer associations. 
He is currently Chairman of the Logson 
Group and a non-executive director of 
Swanline Print Limited. Bob chaired the 
Remuneration Committee until 31 August 
2018 when he was appointed as the 
Group’s Senior Independent Director.  
He is a member of the Nominations, 
Remuneration and Audit Committees.

36   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

James Baird
Non-executive Director
James joined the Board on 8 January 
2018. James previously led the Scotland 
and Northern Ireland business of Deloitte, 
before becoming Managing Partner of its 
Audit & Risk Advisory division and Chief 
Operating Officer, both in Switzerland.  
An experienced auditor and advisor who 
has worked with companies in the UK  
and Europe across a range of industries, 
he is currently an Honorary Professor  
at Glasgow University’s Adam Smith 
Business School, a trustee of RS 
Macdonald Charitable Trust and a 
member of the Advisory Council of 
Rainforest Trust UK. James was appointed 
as chair of the Audit Committee on his 
appointment on 8 January 2018 and is a 
member of both the Remuneration and 
Nominations Committees.

Andrea Dunstan
Non-executive Director
Andrea joined the Board on 1 September 
2018 and has significant experience in 
the areas of performance management, 
organisational development, strategy 
and change management across several 
sectors notably distribution and third 
party logistics. She was most recently 
Chief People Officer at Premier Farnell 
PLC. Andrea is a non-executive Director 
of Sumo Group PLC, where she is chair  
of the Remuneration Committee and a 
member of the Audit and Nominations 
Committees. She is also a non-executive 
Director and Chair of the Remuneration 
Committee at TI Fluid Systems PLC. 
Andrea was appointed as chair of the 
Remuneration Committee on her 
appointment on 1 September 2018  
and is a member of both the Audit  
and Nominations Committees.

James Macdonald
Group Financial Controller  
and Company Secretary 
James joined Macfarlane Group in 
October 2020, becoming Company 
Secretary on 1 January 2021. He 
previously worked for The Weir Group 
PLC, after undertaking his accountancy 
training at PwC. He is a member of the 
Institute of Chartered Accountants  
of Scotland. 

Stuart Paterson

Peter Atkinson

Ivor Gray

John Love

Bob McLellan

James Baird

Andrea Dunstan

James Macdonald

Corporate  
information 

Registration number 
No. SC 004221 
Registered in Scotland

Company Secretary
James Macdonald

Registered office
3 Park Gardens  
Glasgow G3 7YE  
Telephone: 0141 333 9666 
Email: info@macfarlanegroup.com

Principal bankers
Lloyds Banking Group PLC 
110 St. Vincent Street 
Glasgow G2 5ER

Solicitors
CMS Cameron McKenna  
Nabarro Olswang LLP 
1 West Regent Street 
Glasgow G2 1AP

Wright Johnston & Mackenzie LLP 
302 St. Vincent Street 
Glasgow G2 5RZ

Stockbrokers
Shore Capital Stockbrokers Limited 
Cassini House 
57 St James’s Street 
London SW1A 1LD

Independent auditor
Deloitte LLP 
110 Queen Street 
Glasgow G1 3BX

Registrars
Equiniti 
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex BN99 6DA

37

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Report of the Directors

The Directors present their annual 
report and the audited financial 
statements of the Group for the year 
ended 31 December 2020. Pages 4 to 
61 inclusive comprise the Directors’ 
Report, which in turn includes the 
Chairman’s Statement and the 
Strategic Report on pages 4 to 35. 
These reports have been drawn up 
and presented in accordance with and 
in reliance upon applicable company 
law and any liability of the Directors in 
connection with these reports shall 
be subject to the limitations and 
restrictions provided by such laws. 

Corporate governance
The information that fulfils the 
requirement of the Corporate 
Governance Statement can be found 
in the Corporate Governance Report 
on pages 53 to 61 (and is incorporated 
into this report by reference) with the 
exception of the information referred 
to in the Financial Conduct Authority 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules 
7.2.6, which is located within this report.

Report on greenhouse gas emissions
Details of the Group’s emissions  
and policies are contained within the 
Corporate Responsibility Report on 
pages 31 to 33.

Cautionary statement
The Chairman’s Statement and the 
Strategic Report have been prepared 
to provide additional information to 
members of the Company to assess 
the Group’s strategy and the potential 
for the strategy to succeed. They 
should not be relied on by any other 
party or for any other purpose.

This report and the financial 
statements contain certain  
forward-looking statements relating  
to operations, performance and 
financial status. By their nature, such 
statements involve risk and uncertainty 
because they relate to events and 
depend upon circumstances that will 
occur in the future. There are a number 
of factors, including both economic 
and business risk factors, which could 
cause actual results or developments 
to differ materially from those 
expressed or implied by these 
forward-looking statements.

These statements are made by the 
Directors in good faith based on the 
information available to them up to 
the time of their approval of this 
report. Nothing in this report and  
the financial statements should be 
considered or construed as a profit 
forecast for the Group.

Results and dividends
The Group’s profit before tax  
from continuing activities was 
£13,002,000 (2019: Restated* 
£11,862,000). This resulted in a profit 
for the year of £10,171,000 (2019: 
Restated* £9,600,000). Details of  
the restatements are set out on 
pages 76 and 77.

The Directors declared an interim 
dividend of 0.70p per share, which 
was paid on 8 October 2020 (2019: 
0.69p per share). The proposed final 
dividend of 1.85p per share (2019: Nil 
per share) is subject to approval by 
shareholders at the AGM in May 2021 
and has not been included as a liability 
in these financial statements.

Capital structure
The Group funds its operations from 
a number of sources of cash, namely 
operating cash flow, bank borrowings, 
lease borrowings and shareholders’ 
equity, comprising share capital, 
reserves and retained earnings. The 
Group’s objective is to achieve a capital 
structure that results in an appropriate 
cost of capital whilst providing flexibility 
in immediate and medium-term 
funding to accommodate any material 
investment requirements. All major 
investment decisions reflect capital 
allocations which are designed to 
maintain the Group’s objective.

The Company has one class of 
ordinary share, which carries no  
right to fixed income. Each ordinary 
share carries the right to one vote at 
general meetings of the Company. 
There are no restrictions on the  
size of shareholdings nor on the 
transfer of shares. Both are governed 
by the Articles of Association of  
the Company (’the Articles’) and 
prevailing legislation. The Directors 
are not aware of any agreements 
between the Company’s 

shareholders that may result in 
restrictions on the transfer of 
securities or on voting rights.

No person has any special rights of 
control over the Company’s share 
capital and all issued shares are fully 
paid. There were no movements in 
the issued share capital during the 
year with details shown in note 19  
to the financial statements.

The Company’s banking facilities 
may, at the discretion of the lender, 
be repayable on a change of control.

The Company is governed by the 
Articles, the UK Corporate Governance 
Code (July 2018) and the Companies 
Act 2006 with regard to the 
appointment and replacement  
of Directors. The Articles may be 
amended by special resolution of  
the shareholders. The powers of  
the Directors are detailed in the 
Corporate Governance report.

The Directors will propose an 
ordinary resolution at the 2021 AGM 
seeking authority to allot shares in 
the Company under section 551 of 
the Companies Act 2006 up to an 
aggregate nominal amount of 
£13,151,000.

At the 2020 AGM, the Directors  
were given authority to allot further 
ordinary shares, disapplying any 
pre-emption rights, beyond those 
committed to the share option 
schemes or long-term incentive 
plans up to an aggregate nominal 
value of £3,945,300, which expires  
at the conclusion of the 2021 AGM. 
Resolutions at the 2021 AGM will 
seek to renew for a further year the 
authority over the existing unissued 
and uncommitted ordinary share 
capital of £3,945,300.

Employees and employee  
share schemes
The Company’s policies for employees 
and employee engagement are set 
out in the Corporate Responsibility 
Report on pages 28 to 30. Option 
awards are detailed in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report with those 
awards outstanding at 31 December 
2020 set out in note 44.

38   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Substantial holdings

Funds managed or advised by Rights & Issues Investment Trust plc
Funds managed by Canaccord Genuity Group Inc.
Funds managed or advised by Otus Capital Management
Almadon Limited
Funds managed or advised by Charles Stanley
Funds managed or advised by BGF Investment Management

Number of
 shares held

Percentage

17,250,000
16,909,800
 9,917,419
 9,090,909
7,712,905
6,405,303

10.9%
10.7%
6.3%
5.8%
4.9%
4.1%

The Remuneration Committee 
supervises the award of long-term 
share incentives and specifies the 
performance conditions at the time 
of the award, having regard to the 
objectives of the Company and 
market practice at that time. Further 
details are given in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

Substantial holdings of  
shares in the Company
The Company has received 
notification prior to 25 February  
2021 in accordance with Rule 5 of  
the Financial Conduct Authority’s 
Disclosure and Transparency Rules  
of the voting rights as a shareholder  
of the Company as shown in the  
table above.

Directors
The names of the Directors in office 
at 31 December 2020 together with 
short biographical details, are set  
out on page 36. The Board considers 
its three Non-executive Directors  
to be independent.

All Directors retire by rotation at the 
AGM in May 2021 and offer themselves 
for re-election. P.D. Atkinson and  
I. Gray have service contracts dated  
6 October 2003 and 23 December 
2020 respectively, with notice periods 
of twelve months. S.R. Paterson  
has a letter of appointment dated  
29 September 2020 with a notice 
period of six months. R. McLellan, 
J.W.F. Baird and A.M. Dunstan each 
have letters of appointment dated  
10 March 2019, 8 January 2021 and  
1 September 2018 respectively for 
periods of three years, with notice 
periods of three months.

J. Love will retire from the Board  
and from Macfarlane Group on  
31 March 2021.

No Director, either during or at the 
end of the financial year, had an 
interest in any contract relating to  
the business of the Company or any 
of its subsidiaries. The statement of 
Directors’ interests in the ordinary 
share capital of Macfarlane Group  
is contained in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on page 45.

There are no agreements between 
the Company and its Directors or 
employees that provide for 
compensation for loss of office or 
employment that occurs in the event 
of change of control.

The Company has maintained 
Directors’ and Officers’ liability 
insurance cover throughout the 
financial year. The Company has 
made qualifying third-party indemnity 
provisions for the benefit of Directors 
which remain in force.

Political donations
It is the Group’s policy not to make 
donations for political purposes. 

Special business
A special resolution will be put to 
shareholders to renew for a further 
year the authority in relation to the 
disapplication of pre-emption rights 
over the existing unissued and 
uncommitted ordinary share capital. 
This authority is limited to a maximum 
nominal amount of £3,945,300, 
representing 10% of the current 
share capital.

Non-financial information statement
The table on the following page sets 
out how the Group has complied  
with the Non-Financial Reporting 
Requirements set out in Sections 
414C and 414CB of the Companies 
Act 2006. Where these provisions do 
not form part of the Strategic Report, 
they are deemed to be incorporated 
by cross-reference for the purposes 
of compliance with these sections.

Disclosure of information to auditor
The Directors holding office at the 
date of approval of this Directors’ 
report confirm that, so far as they  
are each aware, there is no relevant 
audit information of which the 
Company’s auditor is unaware.  
Each Director has taken all the steps 
that they ought to have taken as a 
Director to make themselves aware 
of any relevant audit information and 
to establish that the Company’s 
auditor is aware of that information. 
This confirmation is given and should 
be interpreted in accordance with  
the provisions of Section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

Independent auditor
A resolution to re-appoint Deloitte 
LLP as the Company’s auditor will  
be proposed at the AGM in 2021.

Company information
The Company is registered in Scotland 
(SC 004221) and its registered office is 
at 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE.

Approval
The Strategic Report on pages 4  
to 35 and the Directors’ Report on 
pages 4 to 61 were both approved  
by the Board on 25 February 2021.

39

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Report of the Directors  
(continued)

Reporting requirement

Details including the impact on Macfarlane Group including any risks in relation 
to these matters and financial and non-financial KPIs

Business model

Our business model is described on page 6.

Outlook and developments

Main trends/factors likely to affect the future development, performance and position  
of the business including KPIs are set out in the Business and Finance reviews and in the 
Corporate responsibility section both within the Strategic review on pages 4 to 35.

Principal risks 

The principal risks, potential adverse impacts and mitigating actions are set out in the 
Principal risks and uncertainties section on pages 20 to 23.

Stakeholder engagement

The Stakeholder engagement section on pages 24 to 26 includes details summarising how 
Directors have had regard to the need to foster the Company’s and the Group’s business 
relationships with all stakeholders, and the effect on the principal decisions taken by the 
Group during the financial year.

Employees

The main policies and interactions with our employees are set out in the Chief Executive’s 
review on pages 8 to 13, Principal risks and uncertainties on pages 20 to 23, the Stakeholder 
engagement section on pages 24 to 26, the Our people, culture and the community chapter 
of the Corporate responsibility section on pages 28 to 30 and the Directors’ remuneration 
report on pages 41 to 49.

Environmental matters

Environmental matters are disclosed in the The environment chapter of the Corporate 
responsibility section on pages 31 to 33 and the Stakeholder engagement section on  
pages 24 to 26.

Financial risk management

Details of the use of financial instruments and financial risk management are set out in the 
Finance review on pages 18 and 19.

Human Rights

Details of our policies in these areas are set out in the Human rights paragraph of the 
Corporate responsibility section on page 29 and the Stakeholder engagement section  
on page 26.

Social and community 
matters

Social and community matters are disclosed in the Covid-19 review on pages 14 to 17,  
the Stakeholder engagement section on pages 24 to 26 and the Corporate responsibility 
section on pages 28 to 35.

Anti-bribery and corruption 
and whistleblowing

Details of our policies in these areas are set out in the Human rights paragraph of the 
Corporate responsibility section on page 29.

James Macdonald
Company Secretary

25 February 2021

40   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
Remuneration report

Remuneration Committee Chair’s summary statement

On behalf of the Board, I am  
pleased to present the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report for the year 
ended 31 December 2020, which has 
been drawn up under the provisions of 
the Companies Act 2006 and taking 
into account the new requirements 
of The Companies (Miscellaneous 
Reporting) Regulations 2018. In 
addition to this statement the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
includes the Annual Report on 
Remuneration on pages 41 to 49. 
Shareholders will be asked to approve 
our Directors’ Remuneration Report 
at the AGM in May 2021 as a normal, 
annual, advisory vote. I am grateful for 
the support which our shareholders 
gave on the resolutions to approve 
our Directors’ Remuneration Report 
for 2019 at the 2020 AGM and the 
three-year Directors’ Remuneration 
Policy at our 2019 AGM.

For information, we have also provided 
a summary of the Remuneration 
Policy, approved by shareholders at 
the 2019 AGM, on pages 50 to 52. 
This does not form part of the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
which shareholders are being asked  
to approve at our 2021 AGM.

The Company has a Remuneration 
Committee constituted in accordance 
with the 2018 UK Corporate 
Governance Code, comprising  
three independent Non-executive 
Directors and the Company Chairman. 
The Committee determines the 
remuneration for the Executive 
Directors and in consultation with  
the Chief Executive determines total 
individual remuneration packages for 
his direct reports, setting incentive 
targets and determining share award 
levels to ensure competitive rewards 
are available for key executives within 
an appropriate governance framework. 

Remuneration in 2020 –  
Covid-19 impact
Due to the unprecedented challenges 
faced in 2020 from Covid-19, actions 
were taken to reduce or defer 
executive remuneration given the 
material uncertainty as to the full 
extent of disruption on the Group’s 
business at the commencement  
of the lockdown in Spring 2020.

These initial actions and others 
relating to the wider employee  
Group included:

•  All Board Directors agreed to a 

reduction of 25% of their salaries 
and fees from April to September 
2020, comprising six months at 
reduced pay;

•  A total of 384 employees were 

furloughed under the Government’s 
Coronavirus Job Retention Scheme 
(’CJRS’). However, for employees 
whose furlough deduction took 
them below the minimum wage, 
the CJRS contribution was topped 
up to minimum wage levels. For 
employees earning above the CJRS 
threshold of £30,000 per annum, the 
Group made contributions to ensure 
that 80% of basic salary was paid;

•  Payment of the 2019 Executive 
Directors’ bonuses due in March 
2020 was deferred and subsequently 
paid in September 2020;

•  The Senior Management Bonus 

scheme for 2020 was put on hold, 
pending a replacement aligned  
with the changing circumstances  
of the Group. All other annual 
incentive schemes for 2020 in  
the Group were also put on hold.  
A ’Performance Award Scheme’ 
was created to provide a shared 
profit incentive for the majority  
of Group employees; and

•  Whilst the Group made 62 

employees redundant in the 
second half of 2020, 54 of these 
were voluntary redundancies.  
The 62 employees were part of  
a workforce of around 900 at the 
start of the second half of 2020. 
These decisions were taken as  
part of a responsible and prudent 
management approach to ensure 
the business was positioned to  
deal with the challenges faced  
in uncertain market conditions.

These actions above were taken, in 
conjunction with a number of other 
management actions, to protect the 
liquidity of the business and preserve 
cash until the impact of Covid-19 on 
the business could be fully determined.

The business demonstrated 
considerable resilience during 2020 
with lower demand from industrial 
customers being largely offset by an 
increase in business from e-commerce 
customers as a consequence of 
Covid-19. The 2020 Group 
performance was ahead of 2019, 
despite the initial downturn. As a result, 
the following actions were taken:

•  Government monies received  
from CJRS to support furlough 
payments made to employees  
in the second quarter of 2020, 
comprising £1.3 million in total, 
were repaid in full in August 2020;

•  To recognise the Executive 

Directors’ effective navigation  
of the business to date through  
the crisis in 2020, the 25% salary 
reduction was repaid to the 
Executive Directors in the final 
quarter of 2020. This was felt 
appropriate given that the Covid-19 
effect on the Group was not as 
severe as initially feared when the 
original decision to reduce salaries 
by 25% was taken; and

41

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report  
(continued)

•  A revised level of Executive Director 
Bonus for 2020 performance was 
agreed. This was capped at 7.5%, 
approximately the same level that 
employees in the Packaging 
Distribution business received under 
the Performance Award Scheme, to 
reflect the team approach adopted 
at all levels in the organisation. 

Group results for 2020 are as set out  
in our Strategic Review. Whilst the 
original performance threshold for 
2020, set before any disruption 
caused by the Covid-19 pandemic, 
was met, we believe the performance 
achieved is more appropriately 
reflected in the revised bonus 
outcomes for 2020 (7.5% of base 
salary for our three Executive 
Directors). We have disclosed the 
performance measures for our 2020 
Annual bonus plan on page 43.

The level of PSP awards in 2020 for 
our Executive Directors were over 
shares worth 100% of the Directors’ 
base salaries as permitted by the 
Directors’ Remuneration Policy, as  
in 2019. Executive Directors hold 
Macfarlane Group shares worth 
between 0.3 times and 3.9 times 
salary at 31 December 2020.

•  Annual bonus – in 2021 there  
is again a maximum payment 
opportunity of 50% of salary with 
40% of salary based on Profit before 
tax (’PBT’) performance and 10% of 
salary based on personal objectives. 
The main focus of the personal 
objectives are business growth, 
leadership development and 
executing effective acquisitions. 
Payment of the personal objectives 
element of the Annual bonus is 
subject to achieving a threshold  
PBT performance. All annual bonus 
payments are subject to the 
discretion of the Remuneration 
Committee; and

•  Long term incentives – the 
Remuneration Committee’s 
intention is to make further PSP 
awards in 2021. The level of 2021 
awards for Executive Directors will 
again be over shares with a value 
equivalent of up to 100% of base 
salaries. Vesting will continue to be 
subject to three-year EPS growth 
conditions with any further 
underpin vesting conditions set  
by the Committee. Details of the 
performance conditions for these 
awards will be set out in 2021 
Directors’ Remuneration Report.

I do hope that you will feel able to 
support the resolution to approve 
this Directors’ Remuneration Report 
at the AGM in May 2021. 

Andrea Dunstan
Chair of the Remuneration Committee

25 February 2021

Remuneration in 2021
There are some key changes to 
Executive Remuneration for future 
years as follows:

•  Pension contributions – All newly-
appointed Executive Directors will 
have pension contribution rates 
consistent with other employees. 
Pension contributions for I. Gray, who 
was appointed Finance Director in 
January 2021, are in line with this new 
requirement. A commitment is also 
made to have P.D. Atkinson’s pension 
contribution rate brought in line  
with those for other employees by  
1 January 2023, in line with the latest 
guidance from the Investment 
Association. J. Love, Finance 
Director until 31 December 2020, 
retires from the Board in March 2021.
•  Post-employment share ownership 
– A new guideline will be introduced 
for Executive Directors, in line with 
UK governance requirements, which 
will require them to hold shares equal 
to their in-employment guideline 
(100% of base salary) for the first 
year post employment and 50% for 
the second year, post-employment. 
This requirement will only apply to 
shares from incentive arrangements 
granted from the date of the next 
LTIP grant in 2021.

Both these changes will be reflected 
in the revised Remuneration Policy  
to be approved at the 2022 AGM.

The other key components of 
executive remuneration at Macfarlane 
Group remain substantially unchanged 
from 2020:

•  Basic salary and benefits – salaries 
have been frozen at 2020 levels, 
reflecting the uncertainty over the 
Group outlook from the challenges 
likely to be faced in 2021. This applies 
to all employees and will be reviewed 
at the end of the first quarter based 
on business performance and 
market conditions;

42   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
Annual report on remuneration

The details set out on pages 43 to 45 of this report have been audited by Deloitte LLP.

Single total figure of remuneration for each Director
Salary 
and fees
£000

2020

Taxable
 benefits
£000

Pension 
costs
£000

Fixed 
pay
£000

Bonus
£000

Variable
 pay
£000

Chairman
S.R. Paterson
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
J. Love
I. Gray (appointed 19 Nov 2020)
Non-executive Directors
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A.M. Dunstan

Total

2019

Chairman
S.R. Paterson
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
J. Love
Non-executive Directors
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A.M. Dunstan

Total

60

362
179
18

30
30
30

709

–

16
10
1

–
–
–

27

–

79
40
2

–
–
–

121

60

457
229
21

30
30
30

857

–

27
13
1

–
–
–

41

–

27
13
1

–
–
–

41

Salary 
and fees
£000

Taxable
 benefits
£000

Pension 
costs
£000

Fixed 
pay
£000

Bonus
£000

Variable
 pay
£000

67

355
176

34
34
34

700

–

16
9

–
–
–

25

–

78
33

–
–
–

111

67

449
218

34
34
34

836

–

81
36

–
–
–

–

81
36

–
–
–

117

117

Total 
pay
£000

60

484
242
22

30
30
30

898

Total 
pay
£000

67

530
254

34
34
34

953

Taxable benefits relate to provision of a company car (or equivalent allowance) and private medical insurance.

Directors’ pension entitlements
P.D. Atkinson receives a cash allowance which equates to 25% of his base salary, including the related employer’s 
national insurance contributions.

J. Love is a member of Macfarlane Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) and the basis of his benefits  
is consistent with all active members of the scheme. His accrued pension at 31 December 2020 was £49,200 (2019: 
£47,300). The related transfer value was £984,000 (2019: £946,000) calculated using HMRC guidelines. The scheme’s 
normal retirement date is 65 with no automatic entitlement to early retirement.

I. Gray is a member of one of the Group’s defined contribution pension schemes, with an employer contribution of 8%  
of salary, consistent with other employees in that scheme.

Annual bonus for the year ended 31 December 2020
The 2020 Annual bonus plan is based on performance against financial targets and personal objectives as set out  
in the Remuneration Policy and is paid in cash following Board approval of the Group Accounts. The original financial 
targets for 2020 are shown below:

Threshold
Target 
Maximum
Actual performance

25% of incentive
50% of incentive
100% of incentive

2020 profit before tax

£13.00m
£13.50m
£15.00m
£13.00m

43

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report  
(continued)

A bonus of up to 10% of base salary is also payable for achievement of personal performance objectives with nothing 
payable under the personal performance element unless the threshold level of PBT is achieved. As explained in the 
Remuneration Committee Chair’s summary statement, given the impact of Covid-19, no amounts were paid in 2020 
under the Annual bonus plan but a revised level of Executive Director bonus was paid in line with the basis of rewards 
under the Performance Award Scheme.

This revised level of Executive Director Bonus for 2020 performance was agreed and capped at 7.5%. The total bonus 
payable for 2020 to P.D. Atkinson was £27,123 (7.5% of salary) J. Love £13,436 (7.5% of salary) and I. Gray £1,343 (7.5% 
of salary) respectively, in line with the equivalent amounts payable to senior staff under the Performance Award Scheme. 

Long term incentives for the year ended 31 December 2020
The Company operates a PSP under which shares are awarded which vest subject to performance over a three-year 
period. No outstanding awards were due to vest during 2020.

Grant of 2020 PSP awards
Awards were granted on 2 September 2020 over shares worth 100% of salary to the two Executive Directors which will vest 
subject to EPS targets for the financial year ended 31 December 2022. EPS performance conditions are shown below:

Threshold (25% of maximum)
Maximum (100% of maximum)

EPS targets (fully diluted EPS before any 
separately disclosed items)

6.53p
7.84p

These targets are deemed to be sufficiently stretching given the impact of Covid-19 in combination with Brexit and  
the material uncertainty this has created for the market outlook. These targets are viewed as an appropriate challenge 
to align the Executives with shareholders at the time they were set in 2020.

The 2020 PSP awards were granted at the three-day average share price of 91.40p from the last trading day prior  
to grant on 2 September 2020. The value of these awards was £361,644 to P.D. Atkinson and £179,143 to J. Love.

Grant of 2019 PSP awards
Awards were granted in 2019 over shares worth 100% of salary to each Executive Director, which will vest subject  
to EPS targets for the financial year ended 31 December 2021. The EPS performance conditions are shown below:

Threshold (25% of maximum)
Maximum (100% of maximum)

EPS targets (fully diluted EPS before any 
separately disclosed items)

6.77p
8.12p

Vesting of both of the awards above will also be subject to an underpin assessment by the Remuneration Committee 
that it must be satisfied regarding overall Group performance before vesting is confirmed. The awards are subject to  
a two-year post-vesting holding period.

Awards held at  
1 January 2020

Awards granted 
during the year

Awards exercised 
during the year

Awards lapsed 
during the year

Awards held at  
31 December 2020

P.D. Atkinson
J. Love
I. Gray

330,123
163,525
57,266

395,672
195,999
124,726

–
–
–

–
–
–

725,795
359,524
181,992

I. Gray was appointed as an Executive Director on 19 November 2020. Both awards shown above were made prior to 
his appointment as a Director.

44   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Payments to past Directors
No payments were made to former Directors in the year or payments made for loss of office.

Shareholdings and share interests of the Directors in office at 31 December 2020 were as set out below:

S.R. Paterson
P.D. Atkinson
J. Love
I. Gray
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A.M. Dunstan

2020

2019

Beneficial

Options

Beneficial

Options

120,000
854,172
800,000
66,652
102,819
66,605
10,000

–
725,795
359,524
181,992
–
–
–

120,000
854,172
800,000
54,836
102,819
66,605
10,000

–
330,123
163,525
–
–
–
–

Executive Directors are expected to build up a prescribed level of shareholding equivalent to 100% of base salary. Both 
P.D. Atkinson and J. Love materially exceed these requirements. I. Gray is currently below this requirement given his 
recent appointment as a Director in November 2020.

Options held by P.D. Atkinson, J. Love and I. Gray are in respect of the PSP awards made in 2019 and 2020. These are 
unvested and subject to the achievement of performance targets described earlier.

The share price ranged from 62.0p to 113.50p during 2020. The closing share price on 31 December 2020 was 87.50p 
(2019: 107.75p).

The remainder of the Annual report on remuneration is not subject to audit.

Performance graph and table
The graph below shows Macfarlane Group’s performance, measured by Total Shareholder Return, compared with the 
performance of the FTSE All-Share Index for Support Services, and the FTSE All-Share Index for General Industrials, 
also measured by Total Shareholder Return for the period since 1 January 2011. Macfarlane Group is a constituent part 
of the General Industrial Index. The Index for Support Services has also been selected because it includes a range of 
distributor companies, which the Remuneration Committee considers to be the most appropriate comparison to 
Macfarlane Group for this purpose.

Total shareholder return index

600

500

400

300

200

100

0

2011

2012

2013

2014

2015

2016

2017

2018

2019

2020

Macfarlane Group

FTSE All Share 
General Industrials

FTSE All Share 
Support Services

Source: Thomson 
Reuters

45

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Remuneration report  
(continued)

CEO single figure

2020
2019
2018
2017
2016
2015
2014
2013
2012
2011
2010

P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson
P.D. Atkinson

Fixed 
remuneration
£000

Variable 
remuneration
£000

Single figure of total
 remuneration
£000

Annual variable
 element award vs.
 maximum opportunity

Long term incentive
 vesting against
 maximum opportunity

457
449
440
433
424
416
408
400
392
400
396

27
81
0
81
92
92
178*
16
70
15
15

484
530
440
514
516
508
586
416
462
415
411

15%
46%
 0%
48%
55%
56%
46%
10%
45%
10%
10%

n/a
n/a
n/a
0%
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a

* This includes £105k in respect of the exercise of options which vested in 2007.

Percentage change in remuneration of Directors and employees
The following table shows the percentage change in remuneration of the Directors and employees of the business 
between the 2019 and 2020 financial years. 

Average for all employees
Executive Directors
P.D. Atkinson
J. Love
I. Gray
Non-executive Directors
S.R. Paterson
R. McLellan
J.W.F. Baird
A.M. Dunstan

% change from 2019 to 2020

Salary or fees

Benefits

Bonus

(5.8%)

(29.7%)

1.1%
19.0%

(66.7%)
(62.6%)

2.0%

2.0%
2.0%
2.0%

(10.7%)*
(10.7%)*
(10.7%)*
(10.7%)*

* Reductions in Non-executive Directors’ fees reflect the agreed reduction in fees of 25% for a six month period in 2020.

The legal requirement is only to provide details of employees of the parent company, Macfarlane Group PLC. However 
we have decided to voluntarily disclose the comparison in respect of details for all Group employees. 

Relative importance of spend on pay
The change in remuneration for all employees compared to dividends to shareholders is shown below:

Total employee pay
Dividend

2020
£000 

30,124
1,105

2019
£000

30,311
3,689

Change

(1%)
(70%)*

*  The decision to cancel the 2019 year-end dividend originally payable in June 2020 to preserve cash at the commencement of the Covid-19 pandemic is the principal 

reason for the reduction in dividends from 2019 to 2020.

CEO to employee pay ratio
The table below shows the ratio of total CEO remuneration to that of the lower quartile, median and upper quartile  
paid employee.

Financial year

Method

2020

2019

Option B

Option B

25th percentile
 pay ratio

50th percentile 
pay ratio

75th percentile
 pay ratio

23.1: 1

24.6 : 1

17.8 : 1

18.9 : 1

14.9 : 1

16.4 : 1

46   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Notes to CEO to employee pay ratio
Option B, using the gender pay gap reporting data to identify the individuals who represent the three quartiles, was 
chosen as the methodology as this data was readily available on a Group-wide basis and is consistent with 2019.

Total remuneration for the CEO and for the individuals who represent the three quartiles was determined for the year 
to 31 December 2020. The three individuals are all full-time employees and are considered to be representative of the 
25th percentile, median and 75th percentile pay levels in the Group.

Median pay ratios are reflective of Macfarlane Group’s policy of not paying excessive salaries to Executive Directors. 
No PSP awards vested in either year, which resulted in a lower ratio than would otherwise have been the case.

The table below shows the total pay and benefits and the salary component of total pay for the three quartiles.

Financial year

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

25th percentile

50th percentile

75th percentile

Salary component of total pay and benefits

Total pay and benefits

2020

2019

£19,550

£18,585

£24,888

£26,998

£29,799

£30,600

£20,977

£21,554

£27,245

£28,078

£32,384

£32,324

Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2021
Salaries for P.D. Atkinson and J. Love were frozen at 2020 levels, in line with all other employees. Their salaries remain  
at £361,644 and £179,143 respectively. I. Gray’s salary on becoming Group Finance Director on 1 January 2021 was set 
at £191,000 following a benchmarking exercise undertaken in 2020. No inflationary increase to this salary was applied 
at the start of 2021.

The salary freeze is deemed appropriate given the continuing uncertainty caused by Covid-19 in the UK market. This 
decision will be monitored and revised if needed, depending on the results in the first quarter of 2021. This salary 
freeze also applies to the Chairman and Non-executive Directors.

There are no changes proposed to the operation of benefits and pensions from the bases operated in 2020.

Executive Directors will be eligible to receive an annual bonus of up to 50% of base salary, with 40% of salary based  
on PBT targets and 10% of salary based on personal objectives. No element of the annual bonus is payable if the PBT 
threshold target is not achieved. The precise PBT targets and the personal objectives framed on an individual basis 
around specific market, operational, human resources and financial priorities are considered by the Board to be 
commercially sensitive. The nature of the targets includes continuing the business on its growth journey, despite the 
market uncertainty that exists particularly for early 2021. This growth will be driven organically across Macfarlane 
Group’s businesses, whilst potential remains for further acquisitions if the right opportunities become available.

The Remuneration Committee intends to make awards under the PSP based on the following principles:

•  An annual award over shares with a face value of up to 100% of salary (within the existing limit);
•  A fixed three-year performance period (with no re-testing);
•  A two-year post-vesting holding period; and
•  A performance condition based on earnings per share performance with a 25% threshold level for vesting and subject 
also to an ’underpin’ assessment by the Remuneration Committee that it must be satisfied regarding overall Group 
performance before vesting is confirmed.

The precise targets will be set by the Committee at the time of the award and will be disclosed in next year’s Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

Details of the Remuneration Committee, advisers to the Committee and their fees
The Remuneration Committee currently comprises three independent Non-executive Directors and the Company 
Chairman. Details of the Directors who were members of the Committee during the year are disclosed on page 57.

The Remuneration Committee used the services of FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP to advise on certain aspects  
of remuneration during 2020 and fees of £11,000 (2019: £13,000) were charged during the year for that advice. The 
Directors consider FIT Remuneration Consultants LLP to be independent of the Group and objective in their advice.

47

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report  
(continued)

Remuneration Committee’s reporting obligations
The Remuneration Committee considered its obligations under the 2018 UK Corporate Governance Code and 
concluded that:

•  The Directors’ Remuneration Policy, as approved by shareholders in May 2019, and our implementation of the Policy 
(including the use of PBT and personal performance measures for the Annual bonus and EPS performance measures 
for the PSP) support the Company’s strategy.

•  The use of PBT and EPS measures reflect the Company’s focus on growing profits and our aims of motivating the 

Executive Directors to achieve a level of profitability that supports the Company paying an attractive level of dividend, 
balanced against the need to retain funds in the business to finance growth, make pension scheme contributions, 
fund acquisitions and meet capital expenditure requirements.

•  Remuneration for the Executive Directors remains appropriate and consistent with our policy of not paying excessive 
salaries. The Remuneration Policy operated as intended, taking into account the challenges of the Covid-19 environment 
and delivered 7.5% of salary as a bonus to our Chief Executive in the year. This is deemed appropriate given it is 
commensurate with the wider employee award scheme introduced in 2020 in response to the Covid-19 environment.

In addition, the Committee addressed the six factors outlined in Provision 40 of the 2018 Code when determining the 
Executive Directors’ remuneration.

•  Clarity – Our Remuneration Policy is well understood by the Executive Directors and by our shareholders, with whom 

we engaged when revising the policy last year.

•  Simplicity – The Remuneration Committee is conscious that overly complex remuneration structures are less 

impactful than simple structures and has strived to keep Executive Directors’ pay as simple as possible whilst also 
offering a competitive remuneration package.

•  Risk – Our Policy has been designed to ensure that it does not promote excessive risk taking (for example, the annual 
bonus and PSP operate on sliding performance scales, rather than relying on binary performance targets) and 
prevents ‘payment for failure’ through modest fixed remuneration and the use of stretching financial performance 
targets. The PSP, which forms the majority of variable pay opportunity, is delivered in shares which vest after three 
years, with a further two-year holding period, ensuring a link to sustained, long-term performance.

  Malus and clawback apply to both the annual bonus and the PSP.

•  Predictability – Incentive plans for Executive Directors are subject to individual and overall caps, ensuring that the 
Remuneration Committee has control over levels of reward. The weighting of variable pay opportunity towards the 
PSP means that actual pay outcomes are highly aligned to the experience of shareholders.

•  Proportionality – All pay levels are appropriately proportionate, not excessive and reflect Macfarlane Group’s 

outlook and culture. Executive Directors’ fixed remuneration is set, after consideration of external benchmarks,  
at a level that is competitive but affordable for the Group, with variable pay linked to the achievement of stretching 
performance targets.

•  Alignment to culture – The performance targets which are used to measure both the annual bonus and the PSP are 
stretching, consistent with Macfarlane Group’s performance-led culture. We do not believe that variable pay should 
be paid for poor performance and have a long track record of setting robust performance targets.

The Remuneration Committee receives a report on pay and benefits across the Company which it considers when 
setting remuneration for Executive Directors. While employees are not directly consulted when setting Executive 
Directors’ remuneration, Andrea Dunstan acts as designated Non-executive Director for employee engagement in 
addition to her role as Remuneration Committee Chair, and so the Remuneration Committee is fully updated on any 
views on remuneration which arise from the engagement process.

Whenever the Board has engaged with shareholders during the year, it has received generally positive feedback, 
including on remuneration matters.

48   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Statement of voting at the Annual General Meeting on 12 May 2020
The Directors’ Remuneration Report received the following votes from shareholders.

For
Against

Total votes cast (for or against)

Votes withheld

Total

Total number
 of votes

% votes cast

71,663,348
 8,250,097

89.68%
 10.32%

79,913,445

100.00%

28,902

79,942,347

Votes received on 12 May 2020 (including votes withheld) amounted to 50.66% of the issued share capital.

Statement of voting at the Annual General Meeting on 14 May 2019
The Directors’ Remuneration Policy received the following votes from shareholders.

For
Against

Total votes cast (for or against)

Votes withheld

Total

Total number
 of votes

% votes cast

58,469,089
 5,101,010

91.98%
 8.02%

63,570,099

100.00%

49,207

63,619,306

Votes received on 14 May 2019 (including votes withheld) amounted to 40.38% of the issued share capital.

49

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report  
(continued)

Remuneration policy

The following pages detail the principal features of the Directors’ Remuneration Policy approved at the 2019 AGM,  
which is shown in full under the Corporate Governance section of the Group website (www.macfarlanegroup.com). 

Salary (fixed pay) 

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Pay a fair salary commensurate with the individual’s role, responsibilities and experience and 
having regard to market rates for similar roles in comparable companies.

The Committee reviews base salaries annually with changes effective from 1 January. This review 
takes into account practices elsewhere in the Group. Salary is pensionable.

There is no prescribed maximum salary or maximum rate of increase. The Committee takes into 
consideration the general increase for the broad employee population but on occasion may 
recognise changes in responsibility, development in the role or specific retention issues.

Retirement benefits (fixed pay)

Link to strategy

Provide competitive pension arrangements to aid recruitment/retention of senior executives.

Operation

The Group pays a pension allowance or contributes to a pension scheme for Executive Directors. 
The Group’s legacy defined benefit scheme has been closed to new members since 2002 and the 
pensionable salary frozen in 2010. Pension contributions for new appointments will be kept under 
review in line with developing market practice.

Opportunity

Company contribution of up to 25% of base salary or equivalent cash allowance in lieu (inclusive of 
employer’s national insurance contribution) are currently paid.

Other benefits (fixed pay)

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Provide cost effective benefits to aid recruitment and retention of senior executives and to 
support the wellbeing of employees.

Benefits include, car allowance or company car, private medical insurance, permanent health 
insurance and any other such benefits as the Committee considers appropriate.

The benefits are not subject to a specific cap but represent a small element of total remuneration. 
Costs to provide these benefits are closely monitored.

Annual bonus (variable pay)

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

Performance measure

Incentivise performance over a 12 month period based on the attainment of financial targets and 
individual performance objectives agreed by the Remuneration Committee.

The bonus is paid in cash based on the audited financial results and the Committee’s assessment 
of delivery against personal objectives. Bonus awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions 
for two years following the award.

Maximum bonus potential capped at 100% of base salary but remains at 50% for 2020. The Annual 
bonus is not pensionable.

Performance measures may be financial or non-financial and corporate, divisional or individual  
and in such proportions as the Committee considers appropriate. The annual bonus plan remains  
a discretionary arrangement and the Committee retains a standard power to apply judgement  
to adjust the outcome of the plan for any performance measure (from zero to any cap) should  
it consider that to be appropriate.

50   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Long term incentives (variable pay)

Link to strategy

Incentivise delivery of strategic targets and sustained performance over the long-term.

Operation

Conditional awards over shares may be granted each year, which can be earned subject to delivery 
of performance goals. The Committee will set such performance conditions on PSP awards as it 
considers appropriate (whether financial or non-financial and corporate, divisional or individual). 
These conditions are for a fixed 3 year period with no re-testing.

Executive Directors are expected to build up a prescribed level of shareholding equivalent to 100% of 
base salary. If the prescribed shareholding has not been reached, Executive Directors will be expected 
to retain a proportion of the shares vesting under the Company’s PSP until the guideline is met.

LTIP awards are subject to malus and clawback provisions for 3 years following vesting.

Opportunity

Awards are capped at a maximum of 100% of base salary in normal circumstances (200% in 
exceptional circumstances). 

Performance measure

Conditional awards will vest based on three-year performance against challenging financial and 
other targets set and assessed by the Committee in its discretion.

Clawback/malus in the Annual bonus and long term incentives
Provisions are in place for both Annual bonus and LTIP arrangements to operate malus and/or clawback in certain 
exceptional circumstances, including the material misstatement of the Company’s results (annual bonus and LTIP),  
if the assessment of performance on which vesting is based was based on an error (LTIP only) or circumstances which 
would warrant the summary dismissal of the individual, whether or not the Company has chosen to do so.

Consideration of employment conditions elsewhere in the Group
There is a periodic employee survey and the Board receives a regular presentation from the Director of Human 
Resources, which includes consideration of the Group’s remuneration policies. As a result, the Remuneration 
Committee has not conducted a specific employee consultation exercise on the Directors’ remuneration policy.

While appropriate benchmarks vary by role, the Company seeks to apply the philosophy behind this policy across the 
Group as a whole. Where the Company’s pay policy for Directors differs from its pay policies for Groups of employees, 
this reflects the appropriate market rate position and/or typical practice for the relevant roles. The Committee takes 
into account pay levels, bonus opportunity and share awards across the Group when setting the Remuneration Policy.

Consideration of shareholder views
The Committee considers shareholder feedback received as part of any dialogue with shareholders via the Chairman, 
executive management or the Company’s brokers. Where necessary the Remuneration Committee Chair will engage 
pro-actively with shareholders such as in advance of proposed awards under the Performance Share Plan. 

Approach to recruitment remuneration
The Remuneration Committee will follow the above policy when setting remuneration for a new Executive Director. 
Base salary will be set at a competitive level appropriate for the role and experience of the Director being appointed.  
In the case of an external appointment, the Committee may consider it appropriate to recognise awards or benefits 
that will or may be forfeited on resignation from the previous appointment. This may be cash and/or share awards but 
the maximum payment will be no more than the Committee considers is required to provide reasonable compensation.

If the Director is required to relocate then reasonable relocation, travel and subsistence payments will be provided  
at the discretion of the Committee and for a period of no more than two years following appointment.

Service contracts and letters of appointment
Executive service contracts have a standard notice period of 12 months. The Committee reserves flexibility to alter 
these principles to secure the appointment of an appropriate candidate and if appropriate introduce a longer initial notice 
period, of up to two years, reducing over time. Executive Directors may accept appointments outside the Company 
provided the Board’s permission is obtained, however the Board may require the fees from these appointments to be 
accounted for to the Company. Neither P.D. Atkinson, J. Love nor I. Gray currently hold any external appointments.

Chairman and Non-executive Director appointments are made using letters of appointment for periods not exceeding 
three years subject to re-election at the AGM and contain notice periods of six months and three months respectively.

51

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Remuneration report  
(continued)

Non-executive Director remuneration policy
Chairman

Link to strategy

To attract and retain a high-calibre Chairman by offering a market competitive fee level.

Operation

Opportunity

The Chairman is paid a single fee for all his responsibilities, which is reviewed periodically  
by the Committee with reference to other comparable companies.

The current fee is £68,931 and is subject to periodic change under this policy. There is no 
maximum fee level.

Non-executive Directors

Link to strategy

Operation

Opportunity

To attract and retain high-calibre Non-executive Directors by offering a market competitive 
fee level.

Non-executive Directors are paid a basic fee. Committee Chairs may be paid a supplement  
to reflect additional responsibilities. Fee levels are reviewed periodically by the Chairman and 
the Executive Directors with reference to other comparable companies.

The current fee is £34,465 and is subject to periodic change under this policy. There are 
currently no supplementary fees paid and there is no maximum fee level.

Payment for loss of office
The Committee’s policy for an Executive Director whose employment is to be terminated is to agree a termination 
payment based on the value of base salary, contractual pension contributions and other benefits that would have 
accrued during the contractual notice period unless there has been a breach of the service agreement by the Director.

The policy is that the departing Director may work or be placed on garden leave for all or part of their notice period or 
receive payment in lieu of notice in accordance with the service agreement. The Committee supports the principle of 
mitigation and phased payments relative to any settlement and will take legal advice in relation to any settlements to 
be proposed. Share-based entitlements for Executive Directors will be determined based on the relevant plan rules.

The Company has the power to enter into settlement agreements with Directors and to pay compensation to settle 
potential legal claims. This policy does not include an explicit cap on the cost of termination payments.

Committee discretions
The Committee has discretion, consistent with market practice, including the terms and the termination of any 
contract, in relation to the operation and administration of share plans. Any use of these discretions would be 
explained in the Director’s Remuneration Report and if appropriate be the subject of consultation with major 
shareholders. The Committee may make minor amendments to the policy set out above without obtaining 
shareholder approval.

52   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Corporate governance

The Board considers its Non-executive 
Directors, Bob McLellan, James  
Baird and Andrea Dunstan to be 
independent both in character and 
judgement. None of these Directors:

•  Has been an employee of the 

Group within the last five years;
•  Has, or has had within the last  

three years, a material business 
relationship with the Group;
•  Receives remuneration other  

than a Director’s fee;

•  Has close family ties with any of  
the Group’s advisers, Directors  
or senior employees;

•  Holds cross-directorships or has 

significant links with other Directors 
through other companies or bodies;

•  Represents a significant 

shareholder; or

•  Has served on the Board for more 
than nine years from the date of 
their first election.

The balance of the Board’s skills  
and experience is kept under regular 
review. The Board’s succession plans 
recognise the need to consider wider 
diversity within the Group and in Board 
composition in the medium-term. We 
are also committed to improving the 
sustainability both of our operations 
and of the products that we offer our 
customers. The Board recognises that 
both of these objectives are to the 
benefit of all stakeholders of the Group.

Macfarlane Group is committed  
to the principles of corporate 
governance set out in the Financial 
Reporting Council’s (’FRC’) UK 
Corporate Governance Code issued 
in 2018 (’the Code’). The Company’s 
compliance is set out in the narrative 
statement on pages 53 to 61 and  
for Directors’ remuneration in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report  
on pages 41 to 49.

Compliance
The Company fully complied with all 
the Code provisions during 2020. The 
Company’s auditor, Deloitte LLP, is 
required to review whether the above 
statement (in addition to its wider 
remit under the Listing Rules) reflects 
the Company’s compliance with the 
provisions of the Code specified for 
its review by the Financial Conduct 
Authority’s Listing Rules and to report 
if it does not reflect such compliance.

The Board
The current Board structure is in 
compliance with the Code, requiring 
companies outside the FTSE 350  
to have at least two independent 
Non-executive Directors.

The Board currently comprises  
the Chairman, three independent 
Non-executive Directors and three 
Executive Directors, albeit the number 
of Executive Directors will reduce to 
two in April 2021. Directors’ names and 
biographical details, illustrating their 
range of experience and the benefit 
that each Director’s appointment 
brings to Macfarlane Group are set 
out on page 36. 

The Directors believe that the Board 
has an appropriate independent 
Non-executive Director complement 
with recent and relevant experience, 
which brings strong, independent 

judgement to the Board’s 
deliberations. Non-executive 
Directors contribute towards and 
challenge Group strategy as well as 
scrutinising performance in meeting 
agreed objectives and monitoring  
the reporting of performance. They 
satisfy themselves as to the integrity 
of the financial information and that 
the financial controls, systems of  
risk management and governance 
structure are robust and defensible.

Non-executive Directors have access 
to independent professional advice  
at the Group’s expense, subject to 
certain limits and procedures, when it 
is deemed necessary in order for them 
to effectively fulfil their responsibilities.

Details of Executive Directors’ 
service contracts are given in the 
Directors’ Report with all Executive 
Directors’ service contracts having 
notice periods of one year.

The Company has maintained 
Directors' and officers' liability 
insurance cover throughout the 
financial year. The Company made 
qualifying third-party indemnity 
provisions for the benefit of Directors 
in 2009, and these have remained in 
force throughout 2020 and to the 
time of this report.

The Board confirms that it has 
considered and authorised any 
conflicts or potential conflicts of 
interest in accordance with the 
Group’s existing procedures.

The Chairman’s other commitments 
are shown in his biography on page 
36. The Board is satisfied that these 
do not interfere with the performance 
of Group duties which is based on  
a commitment of approx. 45 days  
per annum.

53

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance  
(continued)

The roles of the Chairman  
and Chief Executive
The division of responsibilities 
between the Chairman and the  
Chief Executive is very clearly defined 
and has been approved by the Board. 
The Chairman is responsible for 
running the Board, ensuring that all 
Directors receive sufficient and 
relevant information on financial, 
business and corporate issues prior 
to meetings to allow Directors to 
bring independent judgement to  
bear on all issues. The Chairman 
facilitates the effective contribution  
of Non-executive Directors and 
ensures effective communication 
channels with shareholders.

The Chief Executive’s responsibilities 
focus on managing the business and 
implementing the Group’s strategy.

Senior Independent Director
Bob McLellan is the Senior 
Independent Director. Shareholders 
may contact him directly if they  
feel their concerns are not being 
addressed and resolved through 
existing mechanisms for investor 
communication.

Re-election of Directors
At each AGM, all Directors fall due  
to retire and, being eligible, offer 
themselves for election. Directors’ 
service contracts and letters of 
appointment will be available for 
shareholder review prior to the  
AGM on 11 May 2021.

Subject to the Company’s Articles of 
Association, the Companies Act and 
satisfactory performance evaluation, 
Non-executive Directors are 
appointed for an initial period of  
three years. Before the third and sixth 
anniversary of the Non-executive 
Director’s first appointment, the 
Chairman will discuss with the Director 
whether it is appropriate for a further 
three-year term to be served. 

Company Secretary
James Macdonald, the Company 
Secretary, is responsible for advising 
the Board through the Chairman on 
all matters relating to corporate 
governance. Under the direction of the 
Chairman, the Company Secretary’s 
responsibilities include ensuring good 
information flows within the Board, its 
committees and between executive 
management and Non-executive 
Directors. The Company Secretary 
also facilitates induction and assists 
with professional development for 
the Board. All Directors have access 
to the advice and services of the 
Company Secretary.

The Articles of Association and the 
schedule of matters reserved for the 
Board provide that the appointment 
and removal of the Company Secretary 
is a matter for the Board as a whole.

Board procedures
The Group is controlled by the Board 
of Directors. The Board’s main roles 
are to set the Group’s strategic 
objectives, guide and support 
executive management in achieving 
these objectives, create value for  
and safeguard the interests of all 
shareholders within the appropriate 
legal and regulatory framework.  
The Board met nine (2019: seven) 
times during 2020 and individual 
attendance at those and the Board 
Committee meetings is set out in  
the table on the following page. Two 
additional meetings were added to 
the normal schedule in April 2020  
and June 2020 to review in detail the 
Group’s response to the Covid-19 
pandemic. Key members of the 
management team joined the 
meetings to further develop the 
Board’s understanding of the 
business. In the eight meetings  
from March to December there  
was a detailed review of the Group’s 
response to Covid-19 ensuring:

•  there was appropriate consideration 
of the effect on the principal risks 
likely to impact on the Group and 
any related internal controls;
•  there was sufficient headroom  
in the bank facilities considering  
a range of possible scenarios;

•  measures were in place to ensure the 
health and wellbeing of employees;

•  service to customers was being 

maintained; and 

•  actions were being taken to preserve 

cash and control costs.

Further detail of the Board’s response 
to Covid-19 and consideration of the 
impact on stakeholders is provided in 
the Covid-19 section on pages 14 to 
17 and the Stakeholder engagement 
section on pages 24 to 26.

54   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

The Board has a formal schedule  
of matters reserved for its approval. 
The specific matters reserved for  
the Board include setting the Group’s 
strategy and approving an annual 
budget, reviewing management 
performance, approving acquisitions, 
divestments and major capital 
expenditure, monitoring returns on 
investment, reviewing the Group’s 
systems of internal control and risk 
management and consideration of 
significant financing matters. The 
Board has delegated to executive 
management responsibility for the 
development and recommendation 
of strategic plans for consideration by 
the Board, the implementation of the 
strategy and policies of the Group as 
determined by the Board, the delivery 
of the operating and financial plan, 
approval of capital expenditure  
below Board authority levels and the 
development and implementation  
of risk management systems.

Board agendas are set by the 
Chairman, who consults with the  
Chief Executive and discusses the 
agendas with the Company Secretary. 
A programme of areas for discussion is 
maintained by the Company Secretary 
to ensure that all matters reserved for 
the Board and any other key issues are 
addressed at the appropriate time.

At each meeting, the Directors receive 
management information and reports 
from the Chief Executive and the 
Finance Director which, together  
with other papers, enables them to 
scrutinise the Group and management 
performance against agreed 

objectives. These and other regular 
reports and papers are circulated to 
the Directors in a timely manner in 
preparation for Board and Committee 
meetings and are supplemented by 
information specifically requested  
by the Directors from time to time.

Accountability
The Board is responsible for 
presenting a fair, balanced and 
understandable assessment of the 
Group’s position and prospects and 
asks the Audit Committee to consider 
and advise the Board of its view.

The Board considers that the Annual 
Report provides the information 
necessary for shareholders to assess 
the Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Directors’ Responsibilities 
Statement is set out on page 62.

Going concern
Given the significant disruption and 
economic uncertainty caused by the 
Covid-19 pandemic, the Directors 
extended their consideration of 
going concern with the review of 
additional scenario analysis as set  
out in the Viability Statement on  
page 27. After making these enquiries, 
the Directors have a reasonable 
expectation that the Company and 
the Group have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence 
for at least the next twelve months 
from the date of this report. For this 
reason they continue to adopt the 
going concern basis in preparing the 
financial statements.

Attendance by Directors at Board and Committee meetings during 2020

Board and Committee meetings
The number of regular Board and 
Committee meetings attended by 
each member during 2020 is shown 
in the table below.

Professional development
On appointment, all Directors 
complete an induction programme 
designed to give them a thorough 
understanding of the Group and its 
activities. They receive information 
about the Group, the matters reserved 
for the Board, the terms of reference 
and membership of the Board 
Committees, and the latest financial 
information. This is supplemented 
with visits to key locations and 
meetings with and presentations 
from senior management.

Board performance evaluation
The Board has established a formal 
process, led by the Chairman, for an 
annual performance evaluation of the 
Board, its Committees and individual 
Directors. All Directors are made aware 
that their performance will be subject 
to regular evaluation. The Board  
has completed a self-assessment 
questionnaire developed to take 
account of the areas identified in the 
FRC ’Guidance on Board Effectiveness’. 
This includes specific reference  
to strategic objectives and the 
performance and processes of the 
Board and all Board Committees.

Board

Audit
 Committee

Remuneration
Committee

Nominations
Committee

Stuart Paterson
Peter Atkinson
John Love
Ivor Gray
Bob McLellan
James Baird 
Andrea Dunstan

Chairman
Chief Executive
Finance Director
Executive Director (appointed 19 November 2020)
Senior Independent Director
Non-executive Director
Non-executive Director

9 (9)
9 (9)
9 (9)
1 (1)
9 (9)
9 (9)
9 (9)

2 (3)*
–
–
–
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)

3 (3)
–
–
–
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)

3 (3)
–
–
–
3 (3)
3 (3)
3 (3)

Figures in brackets indicate the maximum number of meetings in 2020 for which the individual was a Board or Committee member. Where a Director cannot attend  
a Board or Committee meeting, any comments the Director has on the papers being reviewed at that meeting are relayed in advance for consideration.

* The Chairman attends but is not a member of the Audit Committee.

55

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance  
(continued)

Results are collated by the Company 
Secretary and reviewed to identify 
areas for improvement and confirm 
objectives for the year ahead. The 
Chairman then holds individual 
meetings with each Director to 
review performance and set 
individual objectives.

The Chairman meets with the 
Non-executive Directors during  
the year without the Executive 
Directors present. The three  
Non-executive Directors conduct  
an annual performance evaluation  
of the Chairman.

Relationships with shareholders
The Group maintains a corporate 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com) 
containing a wide range of information 
of interest to institutional and  
private investors.

Detailed reviews of the performance 
and financial position are included in 
the Strategic Report on pages 4 to 35 
of this report. The Board uses this, 
together with the Chairman’s 
Statement on pages 4 and 5 and  
the remainder of the Report of the 
Directors on pages 38 to 40, to 
present its assessment of the 
Company’s position and prospects.

The Chairman seeks to maintain a 
regular dialogue with shareholders 
and gives feedback to the Board on 
issues raised. The Group has regular 
discussions with institutional 
shareholders, including meetings led 
by the Chief Executive and the Finance 
Director, following the announcement 
of the annual results in February and 
the interim results in August. Individual 
requests for discussions from 
shareholders are considered.

The Board receives feedback on 
shareholder meetings, including 
broker feedback, for the meetings 
scheduled around the results’ 
announcements. The Senior 
Independent Director is available to 
meet with shareholders if they have 
concerns with contact through the 
normal channels of Chairman, Chief 
Executive or Finance Director.

All Directors attend the AGM. All 
shareholders have an opportunity  
to raise questions with members of 
the Board on matters relating to the 
Group’s operations and performance 
during the meeting and to meet 
Directors after the formal 
proceedings have ended. Details of 
the resolutions to be proposed at the 
AGM can be found in the Notice of 
Meeting accompanying the Annual 
Report and Accounts. The Notice of 
Meeting is sent out more than 20 days 
in advance of the meeting. In line with 
the requirements of the Code, the 
results of proxy votes are disclosed  
at the AGM, notified to the Stock 
Exchange and made available on the 
Group website following the meeting.

Nominations Committee

The Nominations Committee  
during 2020 was as follows:

Stuart Paterson (Chair) 
Bob McLellan 
James Baird 
Andrea Dunstan  

The Committee met three times 
during 2020.

Its terms of reference are  
available on the Group website  
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

The principal work undertaken by  
the Nominations Committee in 2020 
was to consider and recommend  
that the Company propose for 
re-election any Directors falling due 
for re-appointment at the AGM and  
to oversee the process to identify  
and appoint a new Finance Director.

The Committee’s ongoing 
responsibilities include reviewing the 
structure, size and composition of the 
Board and giving full consideration  
to succession planning for both 
executive and Non-executive 
Directors and other senior executives. 
The Nominations Committee will 
continue to consider the mix of  
skills, experience and diversity that 
the Board requires and seek the 
appointment of Directors to meet  
its assessment of what is required  
to ensure that the Board is effective 
in discharging its responsibilities.

Following a Nominations Committee 
held in 2020 the Committee proposed 
that all Directors make themselves 
available for re-election at the AGM 
on 12 May 2020.

56   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

(d)   To consider awards of share-based 
incentives and determining the 
performance conditions for these 
awards; and

(e)   To approve the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report.

The work of Remuneration 
Committee is described in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report  
on pages 41 to 49.

During 2020, the Committee ran  
a process to select and appoint a  
new Finance Director. Following an 
extensive process which included a 
review of both internal and external 
candidates, Ivor Gray, the Group 
Financial Controller and Company 
Secretary was appointed to the Board 
on 19 November 2020 and became 
Finance Director on 1 January 2021. 
A qualified chartered accountant, Ivor 
has worked at Macfarlane Group for 
24 years in a variety of financial and 
commercial roles including Financial 
Director of Macfarlane Labels, 
General Manager of Macfarlane  
USA and Commercial Director of 
Macfarlane Packaging Distribution. 
Ivor has a wide experience and an 
in-depth knowledge of the Group, 
making him the ideal candidate for 
the role of Finance Director. 

In order to ensure continuity and a 
smooth transition of responsibilities to 
the new Finance Director, John Love 
will remain as a Director of the Group 
until 31 March 2021, when he will retire 
from the Board and the Company.

No Director is involved in any 
decisions regarding their own 
appointment or re-appointment.

Remuneration 
Committee

The Remuneration Committee 
during 2020 was as follows:

Andrea Dunstan (Chair) 
Bob McLellan 
James Baird 
Stuart Paterson

None of the members of the 
Remuneration Committee during 
2020 has any personal financial 
interests, other than as a 
shareholder, in the matters to  
be decided, conflicts of interests 
arising from cross-directorships  
or any day-to-day involvement  
in running the business.

The Committee met three times 
during 2020. Its terms of reference 
are available on the Group website 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com).

The principal work undertaken  
by the Remuneration Committee  
in 2020 was:

(a)   To review performance against 
2020 financial and personal 
objectives and to conclude on an 
appropriate performance related 
reward under the Annual bonus 
plan for senior executives including 
the Executive Directors;

(b)   Given the Covid-19 pandemic,  
no awards were due under the 
original incentive schemes. The 
Committee then reviewed the 
proposed Performance Award 
Scheme for 2020 for the majority 
of the Group’s staff and sought to 
align bonuses for senior executives 
including those for the Executive 
Directors to this Scheme;

(c)   To approve financial and personal 
objectives for 2021 in relation to 
the performance related Annual 
bonus plan;

57

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance  
(continued)

Audit Committee

During 2020 the Audit Committee 
comprised: 

James Baird (Chair) 
Bob McLellan 
Andrea Dunstan

James Baird was appointed as Chair 
of the Committee on 8 January 2018 
given his relevant experience. The 
remaining Committee members, Bob 
McLellan and Andrea Dunstan have a 
wide range of commercial experience 
as evidenced in their biographical 
details on page 36. The Committee 
Chairman will be available to answer 
questions on any aspect of the 
Committee’s work at the AGM.

The Company Chairman attends 
meetings to give the benefit of his 
relevant experience but is no longer a 
member of the Committee. Executive 
Directors, members of executive 
management and internal auditors 
attend certain meetings at the 
invitation of the Committee Chair.

The Committee’s terms of reference 
are displayed on the Group website, 
(www.macfarlanegroup.com) and its 
principal oversight responsibilities 
cover the following five areas:

•  Internal control and risk 

management 
The Committee reviews annually 
the Group’s system of risk 
management and internal control 
and processes for evaluating and 
monitoring the risks facing the 
Group. The overall responsibility for 
the systems of internal control and 
for reviewing their effectiveness 
rests with the Board.

•  Internal audit 

The Committee monitors and 
reviews the effectiveness of the 
Group’s internal audit function and 
its terms of reference annually and 
recommends to the Board any 
changes required following its 
review. Reports from internal audit 
are considered at each meeting and 
the Committee actively engages  
in selecting and prioritising areas  
to be subject to audit.

•  Whistleblowing 

The Committee monitors the 
Group’s arrangements by which 
staff may, in confidence, raise 
concerns about possible 
improprieties in matters of financial 
reporting and other areas including 
an external whistleblowing service 
to take calls from employees.

•  External audit 

The Committee is responsible  
for monitoring the effectiveness  
of the external audit process and 
recommending to the Board the 
appointment, re-appointment  
and remuneration of the external 
auditor. It is responsible for ensuring 
that an appropriate relationship 
between the Group and the external 
auditor is maintained, including 
formal consideration of the 
independence of the external 
auditor. The Committee considers 
the framework for the supply of 
non-audit services by the external 
auditor and reviews any proposed 
non-audit services and fees.

•  Financial reporting 

The Committee monitors the 
integrity of the Group’s financial 
statements and the significant 
judgements contained therein 
including assessing the fair, balanced 
and understandable presentation 
within the reporting. The Committee 
also considers any other formal 
announcements relating to the 
Group’s performance. Further details 
are set out on the following pages.

The Audit Committee met three 
times during 2020 and its agenda  
is linked to events in the Group’s 
financial calendar.

The Committee meets privately  
with the external auditor at least  
once in each year. In 2020 the  
Audit Committee discharged  
its responsibilities by:

•  Reviewing its terms of reference;
•  Reviewing the Group’s draft 

financial statements and interim 
results statement prior to Board 
approval and reviewing the external 
auditor’s reports on the final results 
and draft financial statements;

•  Agreeing the continuing 

appropriateness of the Group’s 
accounting policies;

•  Monitoring compliance with 

International Financial Reporting 
Standards; 

•  Challenging the output from  

the Group-wide process used to 
identify, evaluate and mitigate risks 
and associated mitigating controls;

•  Reviewing the effectiveness of  

the Group’s internal controls and 
disclosures made in the Annual 
Report;

•  Reviewing the effectiveness of the 
external auditor at the conclusion 
of the 2019 audit;

•  Agreeing the programme of work 

for the internal audit function taking 
into account identified risks;

•  Discussing reports from the Head 
of Internal Audit on internal audit 
reports and management 
responses to proposals made  
in these reports, ensuring that  
the responses are actioned and 
completed on a timely basis;
•  Agreeing the external auditor’s  
plan for the audit of the Group 
financial statements which  
includes confirmations of auditor 
independence and approval of  
the engagement letter; and

•  Reviewing and approving external 
audit fees and keeping the level  
and nature of non-audit fees  
under review.

58   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Pension scheme deficit
A net liability is recorded at each 
reporting date equivalent to the 
deficit on the Group’s defined benefit 
pension scheme. This liability is 
determined in conjunction with advice 
from the pension scheme actuary and 
can fluctuate significantly based on a 
number of assumptions, some linked 
to market-related factors outwith the 
control of management. The main 
actuarial assumptions that impact 
the deficit are set out in note 24. 
Investments are valued at bid price.

The Audit Committee has debated  
the assumptions being used to 
determine the liabilities in accordance 
with guidance from a number of 
actuarial firms and has satisfied  
itself that the assumptions used  
fall within an acceptable range 
reflecting the duration of liabilities  
in Macfarlane Group’s defined  
benefit pension scheme.

The pension scheme deficit 
calculated by the actuary and  
the related disclosures are based  
on these assumptions and the 
components of the movement in the 
deficit in 2020 have been explained  
to the Committee’s satisfaction.  
The sensitivities of movements  
in the key underlying assumptions  
are clearly set out in note 24. 

Accordingly the Committee is satisfied 
that it has challenged management’s 
assumptions appropriately and is 
comfortable with the reporting  
of the pension scheme deficit.

For the 2020 financial statements, 
the Committee considers its key 
areas of judgement to be:

Valuation of trade receivables
Trade receivables recorded in the 
Group’s balance sheet comprise a 
large number of individual balances. 
The Group reviews all trade 
receivables and provides against 
potentially irrecoverable items 
throughout the year, applying an 
expected credit loss model. The 
Group’s executive management then 
reviews local judgements. Whilst every 
attempt is made to ensure that the 
Expected Credit Loss allowance held 
against doubtful trade receivables is 
as accurate as possible, there remains 
a risk that the provision may not match 
the level of debt which ultimately 
proves uncollectible. At 31 December 
2020, the Group retained a provision 
held against trade receivables of 
£1,148,000 (2019: £310,000) as set 
out in note 14.

The Audit Committee receives details 
of individual receivables > £25,000 
twice in each year. The Committee 
reviews the extent to which year-end 
balances have been settled in 2021  
to date, paying particular attention  
to receivables outwith terms and  
any bad debts written off, comparing 
this with similar analyses produced  
at previous reporting dates. This is 
then considered against the level  
of provision held against trade 
receivables. 

Based on this analysis, the Committee 
is satisfied that it has challenged 
management’s assumptions 
appropriately and that the level  
of provision and the disclosures of 
items beyond terms is appropriate.

During 2020 the Audit Committee 
focused specifically on a number  
of areas relating to management 
judgements and the business 
response to the Covid-19 pandemic  
to ensure that:

•  there was sufficient stress testing  
of the Group’s financial position 
through a full range of possible 
scenarios;

•  there was a robust review of  

trade receivables and inventory 
provisioning to ensure it remained 
appropriate;

•  the internal control environment 
had been maintained, the risk  
of inappropriate management 
override of controls was being 
monitored and where necessary 
mitigating or additional controls 
were implemented; and

•  the increased cyber-security risk 
related to remote working had 
been considered and additional 
controls introduced to reduce  
or mitigate this risk.

Following each Audit Committee 
meeting, copies of the minutes of the 
meetings are circulated to all Board 
Directors and are made available to 
the external auditors by the Company 
Secretary, who acts as Secretary to 
the Committee.

2020 financial statements
Certain accounting policies require 
key accounting judgements or involve 
particularly complex or subjective 
estimates or assumptions which  
will have a significant effect on the 
amounts recognised in the financial 
statements. The Audit Committee 
receives a report from the Finance 
Director for each reported set of 
results, which summarises principal 
judgements taken by executive 
management. The Committee 
discusses and challenges these 
judgements and considers the report 
together with the results of the 
external audit. The Committee then 
makes a recommendation to the 
Board on the suitability of the policies 
and judgements supporting the 
reported results. 

59

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Corporate governance  
(continued)

Audit Committee 
(continued)

Consideration of other matters 
The Committee debates a number of 
other areas for each reporting period 
but does not consider these matters to 
be of such significance as those above. 
For the 2020 financial statements, 
the main other areas included:

•  The Group’s Viability Statement 
includes ’severe but plausible’ 
scenarios applied in arriving at the 
conclusions made. The Committee 
reviewed these scenarios as well as 
the reverse stress testing applied 
to the model used (as disclosed  
on page 27) and was satisfied with 
the assumptions and judgements 
applied and the statement made. 
The Committee was also satisfied 
that the principal terms of the 
Group’s banking facility, which was 
recently extended until 31 December 
2025, have been properly disclosed;

•  Goodwill is allocated to cash 

generating units (’CGUs’) expected 
to benefit from the synergies of  
the business combination, for the 
purpose of impairment testing. 
Carrying values of goodwill for  
each CGU Grouping are considered 
annually. The Committee reviews 
and discusses management’s 
approach to impairment testing 
including the related sensitivity 
analysis given the particular 
circumstances arising under 
Covid-19. The Committee was 
satisfied with the assumptions and 
judgements applied, concluding 
that there was no evidence of 
impairment of goodwill under all 
reasonable sensitivity scenarios;

•  The level and basis for  

property-related provisions  
at 31 December 2020;

•  The level of and basis for inventory 
provisions at 31 December 2020; 

•  The restatement due to prior year 
adjustments set out on pages 76 
and 77; and

•  Acquired businesses are measured 
at the date of acquisition as the 
aggregate fair value of assets, 
liabilities and contingent liabilities. 
The excess of the cost of acquisition 
over the fair value of the identifiable 
net assets is classified as goodwill. 
The Committee reviews this 
process for each acquisition 
undertaken and discusses the 
methodology and assumptions 
used with management and 
concluded that it was satisfied with 
the basis of accounting in this area 
and the resulting measurements.

For all of these other matters the 
Audit Committee is satisfied with  
the approach taken.

The Audit Committee has reviewed 
the contents of this year’s Annual 
Report and Accounts and has advised 
the Board that, in its view, the report is 
fair, balanced and understandable and 
provides the information necessary 
for shareholders to assess the 
Group’s performance, business 
model and strategy.

The Committee monitors the 
Group’s arrangements by which staff 
may, in confidence, raise concerns 
about possible improprieties in 
matters of financial reporting and 
other areas including an external 
whistleblowing service to take  
calls from employees. Details of  
the arrangements are on the Group 
website (www.macfarlanegroup.com). 
All concerns are investigated at  
the earliest opportunity and the 
employee’s anonymity preserved 
wherever possible.

Relationship with external audit
The Audit Committee is responsible 
for the development, implementation 
and monitoring of the Group’s 
position on external audit. The 
Committee’s terms of reference 
assign oversight responsibility for 
monitoring the independence, 
objectivity and compliance of the 
external auditors with ethical and 
regulatory requirements to the  
Audit Committee, and day-to-day 
responsibility to the Finance Director. 
The Audit Committee ensures that 
the Board and external auditor have 
safeguards in place to prevent 
auditor’s independence and 
objectivity being compromised. The 
external auditor also reports to the 
Committee on the actions that it has 
taken to comply with professional 
and regulatory requirements and 
current best practice in order to 
maintain independence.

Each year the Audit Committee 
considers and agrees the scope of the 
audit proposed by the external auditor, 
including coverage of identified risk 
areas. In their review of the 2020 audit 
scope, the Committee requested 
that the external auditors report  
on the following additional areas:

(a)   compliance of receivables and 

inventories provisioning with the 
Group’s approved accounting 
policies;

(b)   procedures and controls over 
claims for Covid-19 related 
Government funding 
programmes such as CJRS; and
(c)   the maintenance of key financial 
controls in particular during the 
period of Covid-19 related 
disruption.

The external auditors reported to  
the Committee on all of these areas  
on conclusion of the 2020 audit.  
No adjustments were made to the 
2020 financial statements or to the 
Group’s internal controls as a result.

60   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

The Committee notes that there are 
no contractual obligations to restrict 
the choice of external auditor. In 
accordance with best practice, the 
audit partner from the external 
auditor rotates off the audit 
engagement every five years.

The Audit Committee monitors 
non-audit services provided to  
the Group by the external auditor, 
recognising that there may be certain 
non-audit work which the external 
auditor is best placed to undertake. 
The Committee’s policy is to keep  
all services provided by the external 
auditor under review to ensure the 
independence and objectivity of the 
external auditor, taking account of 
relevant professional and regulatory 
requirements. Non-audit work to be 
undertaken by the external auditor  
is approved by the Audit Committee  
in advance of the work being 
undertaken. Amounts paid to 
Deloitte LLP during 2020 for audit 
and other services are set out in  
note 2 to the financial statements.

On conclusion of each year’s audit, 
the Audit Committee considers  
the effectiveness of the external 
auditor, in particular assessing the 
level of professional scepticism 
demonstrated throughout the  
audit process and in the challenge  
of management’s assumptions. 
Through the Committee meeting 
privately with the external auditor  
and in subsequent discussions 
between the external auditor and  
the Committee Chair, the actual 
performance of the auditor is 
compared to the audit plan  
originally presented to and agreed  
by the Committee and against the 
service level commitments made  
by the external auditor in the 2019 
audit tender.

Risk management  
and internal control

The Board is responsible for the 
Group’s system of internal control 
and for reviewing its effectiveness.  
It is management’s role to implement 
the Board’s policies on risk and 
control through the design and 
operation of appropriate internal 
control systems. Such systems are 
designed to manage rather than 
eliminate the risk of failure to achieve 
business objectives and by their 
nature can only provide reasonable 
and not absolute assurance against 
material mis-statement or loss.

The Board confirms that an ongoing 
process for identifying, evaluating 
and managing the significant risks 
faced by the Group was in place in 
accordance with the principles of  
the Code and the related guidance. 
The process was in place throughout 
2020 and has continued to the date 
of approval of the Annual Report and 
financial statements. 

The Board regularly reviews the 
Group’s system of internal control. 
The Board’s monitoring covers all 
controls including financial, 
operational and compliance  
controls and risk management. 

The key elements of the internal 
control process are:

•  Monthly and annual financial 
control checklists submitted  
by each business unit;

•  Discussion by the Committee of 

the external auditor’s conclusions 
of its annual audit; and

•  A robust risk assessment process 

as set out below.

Each business’s risk register is kept 
under review during regular review 
meetings in each business. The Board 
considers the risk register every six 
months to maintain an overview of 
risks facing the Group and ensures 
that management has identified and 
implemented appropriate controls, 
which are acceptable to the Board, to 
address these risks. The risk register 
is taken into account in setting the 
internal audit plan each year.

The Audit Committee has received 
reports on cyber-security matters to 
emphasise the importance of having 
robust cyber-security measures in 
place as part of the controls 
framework, but also to ensure that 
employees, customers and suppliers 
are protected from the impact of 
cyber-security breaches.

During the course of its review of the 
system of internal control, the Board 
has not identified nor been advised  
of any failings or weaknesses which  
it has determined to be significant. 
No significant corrective actions  
are outstanding. 

•  Formal Board reporting on a monthly 
basis by the Chief Executive and 
the Finance Director;

•  Formal Board approval of the 

The Directors have continued to 
review the effectiveness of the 
Group’s system of financial and 
non-financial controls.

annual budget;

•  Since 2009, Internal Audit has  
been staffed in-house. Certain 
parts of the internal audit plan  
may be outsourced when specific 
expertise is required. The 
Committee challenges and  
agrees the annual internal audit 
plan, receives reports on internal 
audit issues raised, a six-monthly 
update and an annual report from 
the Head of Internal Audit;

61

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Statement of Directors’ responsibilities in respect  
of the Annual Report and the financial statements

The Directors are responsible for 
preparing the Annual Report and the 
Group and parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations.

Company law requires the Directors to 
prepare Group and parent Company 
financial statements for each financial 
year. Under that law the Directors are 
required to prepare the Group financial 
statements in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting 
Standards as adopted by the European 
Union and have also chosen to prepare 
the parent Company financial 
statements in accordance with 
Financial Reporting Standard 101 
‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’.

Under company law the Directors 
must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied 
that they give a true and fair view of 
the state of affairs of the Group and 
parent Company and of their profit  
or loss for that period. 

In preparing the parent Company 
financial statements, the Directors 
are required to: 

•  select suitable accounting policies 
and then apply them consistently;
•  make judgements and accounting 
estimates that are reasonable  
and prudent;

•  state whether Financial Reporting 
Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’ has been followed, 
subject to any material departures 
disclosed and explained in the 
financial statements; and

•  prepare the financial statements on 
the going concern basis, unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the 
Company will continue in business.

In preparing the Group financial 
statements, International Accounting 
Standard 1 requires that the Directors: 

•  properly select and apply 

accounting policies;

•  present information, including 

accounting policies, in a manner 
that provides relevant, reliable, 
comparable and understandable 
information;

•  provide additional disclosures  

when compliance with the specific 
requirements in IFRSs are insufficient 
to enable users to understand the 
impact of particular transactions, 
other events and conditions on  
the entity’s financial position and 
financial performance; and
•  make an assessment of the 

Company’s ability to continue  
as a going concern.

The Directors are responsible for 
keeping adequate accounting records 
that are sufficient to show and explain 
the Company’s transactions and 
disclose with reasonable accuracy at 
any time the financial position of the 
Company and enable them to ensure 
that the financial statements comply 
with the Companies Act 2006. They 
are also responsible for safeguarding 
the assets of the Company and hence 
for taking reasonable steps for the 
prevention and detection of fraud 
and other irregularities.

The Directors are responsible for  
the maintenance and integrity of the 
corporate and financial information 
included on the Company’s website. 
Legislation in the United Kingdom 
governing the preparation and 
dissemination of financial  
statements may differ from 
legislation in other jurisdictions.

Responsibility statement of the 
Directors in respect of the annual 
financial report
We confirm that to the best of our 
knowledge:

•  The financial statements, prepared 
in accordance with the relevant 
financial reporting framework, give  
a true and fair view of the assets, 
liabilities, financial position and 
profit or loss of the Company and 
the undertakings included in the 
consolidation taken as a whole;

•  The Strategic Report, incorporated 
into the Directors’ Report, includes 
a fair review of the development 
and performance of the business 
and the position of the Company 
and the undertakings included in 
the consolidation taken as a whole, 
together with a description of the 
principal risks and uncertainties 
that they face; and

•  The Annual Report and Accounts, 

taken as a whole, are fair,  
balanced and understandable  
and provide the information 
necessary for shareholders to 
assess the Company’s position  
and performance, business  
model and strategy.

This responsibility statement  
was approved by the Board on  
25 February 2021 and signed  
on its behalf by:

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

25 February 2021 

25 February 2021

62   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC

Report on the audit of the financial statements

1. Opinion

In our opinion:

•  the financial statements of Macfarlane Group plc (the ‘parent company’) and its subsidiaries (the ‘Group’) give  
a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and of the parent company’s affairs as at 31 December 2020  
and of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

•  the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with international accounting 
standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and International Financial 
Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union;

•  the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting Practice, including Financial Reporting Standard 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure 
Framework’; and

•  the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

We have audited the financial statements which comprise:

•  the consolidated income statement;
•  the consolidated statement of comprehensive income;
•  the consolidated and parent company balance sheets;
•  the consolidated and parent company statements of changes in equity;
•  the consolidated cash flow statement; and
•  the related notes 1 to 41.

The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is 
applicable law, and international accounting standards in conformity with the requirements of the Companies Act 
2006 and IFRSs as adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in the 
preparation of the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards, 
including FRS 101 ‘Reduced Disclosure Framework’ (United Kingdom Generally Accepted Accounting Practice).

2. Basis for opinion
We conducted our audit in accordance with International Standards on Auditing (UK) (ISAs (UK)) and applicable law. 
Our responsibilities under those standards are further described in the auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the 
financial statements section of our report. 

We are independent of the Group and the parent company in accordance with the ethical requirements that are 
relevant to our audit of the financial statements in the UK, including the Financial Reporting Council’s (the ‘FRC’s’) 
Ethical Standard as applied to listed public interest entities, and we have fulfilled our other ethical responsibilities in 
accordance with these requirements. The non-audit services provided to the Group and parent company for the 
year are disclosed in note 2 to the financial statements. We confirm that the non-audit services prohibited by the 
FRC’s Ethical Standard were not provided to the Group or the parent company.

We believe that the audit evidence we have obtained is sufficient and appropriate to provide a basis for our opinion.

63

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

3. Summary of our audit approach

Key audit matters

The key audit matter that we identified in the current year was:

 •  Valuation of trade receivables, focussed to balances greater than 60 days and the completeness 

of the expected credit loss model

Within this report, key audit matters are identified as follows:

 Similar level of risk

Materiality

Scoping

Significant changes  
in our approach

The materiality that we used for the Group financial statements was £643k which was determined 
on the basis of 4.9% of profit before tax.

Our audit covered 93% of the Group’s revenue, 95% of the Group’s net assets and 87% of the 
Group’s profit before tax.

Discount, inflation and mortality rates used in the valuation of pension scheme liabilities has  
been removed as a key audit matter in 2020. This is driven as a result of the understanding gained 
during our prior year audit of the methodology used by management’s actuary and benchmarking 
of rates used by management.

This represents the only significant change in our approach in the current year.

4. Conclusions relating to going concern
In auditing the financial statements, we have concluded that the Directors’ use of the going concern basis of 
accounting in the preparation of the financial statements is appropriate.

Our evaluation of the Directors’ assessment of the Group’s and parent company’s ability to continue to adopt  
the going concern basis of accounting included:

•  Comparing the underlying data and key assumptions to past performance, including the impact of both Brexit 

and Covid-19 on the assumptions applied;

•  Assessing the sophistication of the model used to prepare the forecasts, testing the clerical accuracy of those 

forecasts and considering the historical accuracy of the forecasts prepared by management;

•  Assessing headroom in the forecasts cash and covenants;
•  Assessing the financing facilities that are in place in the year including the repayment terms and covenants that 

are in place, ensuring that these have been appropriately reflected in the model;

•  Assessing the likelihood of the downside scenarios and sensitivities performed by management; and 
•  Assessing the adequacy of the going concern disclosures. 

Based on the work we have performed, we have not identified any material uncertainties relating to events or 
conditions that, individually or collectively, may cast significant doubt on the Group's and parent company’s ability  
to continue as a going concern for a period of at least twelve months from when the financial statements are 
authorised for issue.

In relation to the reporting on how the Group has applied the UK Corporate Governance Code, we have nothing 
material to add or draw attention to in relation to the Directors’ statement in the financial statements about 
whether the Directors considered it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting.

Our responsibilities and the responsibilities of the Directors with respect to going concern are described in the 
relevant sections of this report.

64   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

5. Key audit matters
Key audit matters are those matters that, in our professional judgement, were of most significance in our audit  
of the financial statements of the current period and include the most significant assessed risks of material 
misstatement (whether or not due to fraud) that we identified. These matters included those which had the 
greatest effect on: the overall audit strategy, the allocation of resources in the audit; and directing the efforts  
of the engagement team.

These matters were addressed in the context of our audit of the financial statements as a whole, and in forming 
our opinion thereon, and we do not provide a separate opinion on these matters.

5.1. Valuation of trade receivables, focussed on balances greater than 60 days  
and the completeness of the expected credit loss model

Key audit matter 
description

The Group has material trade receivables, £45,961k (2019: £46,695k). A number of these 
receivables are individually material to the financial statements.

The Group has a large number of customers and a significant trade receivables balance with the 
majority of sales on 60-75 day credit terms. Given the total value of trade receivables, we have 
identified a key audit matter around the risk that balances aged greater than 60 days (£837k) 
(2019: £1,339k) are not recoverable and in the completeness of the expected credit loss model.

There is significant level of judgement involved in determining the recoverability of these trade 
receivables and the calculation of the expected credit loss, such as creditworthiness of the 
customer and probability of default. We have thus determined that there is a potential for fraud 
through possible manipulation of the balance.

Management uses an expected credit model based on the past due status of receivables, 
adjusted as appropriate to reflect current conditions and management’s estimates of future 
economic conditions and known recoverability issues.

Trade receivables are included within note 14 to the financial statements. The Audit Committee’s 
consideration in respect of the risk is included on page 59.

The audit procedures we performed in respect of this matter included:

•  Obtaining an understanding of the relevant controls relevant to the expected credit loss model;
•  Assessing the mechanical accuracy and appropriateness of the assumptions, judgements and 

underlying data used in the expected credit loss model; 

•  Performing an analytical review of the year-end receivables balance using industry knowledge 
to challenge the recoverability of any receivables due from customers that we determine may 
be in financial distress;

•  Selecting a sample of trade receivables with greater focus on those aged greater than 60 days 
and agreeing to supporting documentation and, where possible, receipt of cash at bank post 
year-end; and

•  Assessing the appropriateness of judgements made in respect of the recoverability of any 

debtors overdue for 90 days or longer.

How the scope of our 
audit responded to the 
key audit matter

Key observations

We concluded that the valuation of trade receivables recorded in the financial statements  
is appropriate. 

6. Our application of materiality
6.1. Materiality
We define materiality as the magnitude of misstatement in the financial statements that makes it probable  
that the economic decisions of a reasonably knowledgeable person would be changed or influenced. We use 
materiality both in planning the scope of our audit work and in evaluating the results of our work.

Based on our professional judgement, we determined materiality for the financial statements as a whole is  
shown overleaf.

65

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

6. Our application of materiality (continued)
6.1. Materiality (continued)

Group financial statements

Parent company  
financial statements

Profit before tax  
£13,002k

Group materiality 
£643k

Materiality

£643k (2019: £600k)

£322k (2019: £205k)

Basis for 
determining 
materiality

4.9% of profit before 
tax (2019: 5% of profit 
before tax).

Rationale for  
the benchmark 
applied

We have used profit 
before tax as the 
benchmark for our 
determination of 
materiality as we 
consider this to be  
the key performance 
metric for the Group 
and one which is a key 
metric to analysts and 
investors given the 
prominence in the 
Annual Report.

0.5% of net assets (2019: 
0.5% of net assets), capped  
at 50% (2019: 50%) of Group 
materiality.

The parent company holds 
the investments in the Group 
subsidiaries, the value of 
which is the key metric for  
the users of the financial 
statements. As statutory 
materiality would have been 
higher than the component 
materiality, we have capped 
materiality to be 50% of Group 
materiality being £322k.  
50% is deemed appropriate 
based on the company only 
contribution to the Group.

Component 
materiality range 
£322k to £579k

 Profit before tax
 Group materiality

Audit Committee 
reporting 
threshold £32k

6.2. Performance materiality
We set performance materiality at a level lower than materiality to reduce the probability that, in aggregate, 
uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceed the materiality for the financial statements as a whole. 

Group financial statements

Parent company financial statements

Performance materiality

70% (2019: 70%) of Group materiality

70% (2019: 70%) of parent company materiality 

Basis and rationale for 
determining performance 
materiality

In determining performance materiality we considered the following factors:

•  This is our second year of engagement, from our understanding developed in the prior 

year and through our planning work; and

•  Our risk assessment, including the quality of the control environment.

6.3. Error reporting threshold
We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of 
£32k (2019: £30k), as well as differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative 
grounds. We also report to the Audit Committee on disclosure matters that we identified when assessing the 
overall presentation of the financial statements.

7. An overview of the scope of our audit
7.1. Identification and scoping of components
Our Group audit was scoped by obtaining an understanding of the Group and its environment through discussion with 
IT, internal audit, and the Group and component finance teams and by performing walkthroughs of processes across 
each of these areas, including Group-wide controls, and assessing the risk of material misstatement at a Group level. 

For components deemed significant to the Group, full scope audit procedures were performed to materiality  
levels applicable to each entity, which was lower than the Group materiality level and ranged from £322k to £579k 
(2019: £123k to £570k). Components deemed significant are as follows:

•  Macfarlane Group UK Limited
•  Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited
•  Macfarlane Labels Limited
•  Macfarlane Group Ireland (Labels & Packaging) Limited

66   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Macfarlane Labels generates revenues in both Europe and the UK while other Group entities operate primarily 
within the UK where 96% (2019: 97%) of total revenues are generated. Each legal entity operating in the UK 
generates revenue through a range of services and customer bases. 

This provided audit coverage of over 93% (2019: 98%) of the Group’s revenue, 95% (2019: 96%) of the Group’s  
net assets and 87% (2019: 93%) of the Group’s profit. 

Revenue

7%

Profit before tax

Net assets

13%

5%

93%

87%

95%

 Full audit scope
 Review at Group level

The remaining non-significant components were subject to analytical reviews. Our audit work on these components 
was executed at Group materiality. 

At the Group level, we also tested the consolidation process. 

All work on the significant components and consolidation process was performed by the Group engagement team. 

7.2. Our consideration of the control environment
With the involvement of our IT specialist we obtained an understanding of the relevant IT environment, by performing 
walkthroughs of key processes and in some instances performed testing on the relevant general IT controls and 
business cycles. We took a controls reliance approach on the relevant controls for certain components within the 
revenue, trade receivables, expenditure and trade payables business process cycles.

8. Other information
The other information comprises the information included in the annual report (including the Chairman’s statement, 
Macfarlane Group Business Model and Strategy, Chief Executive’s review, Report of the Directors, Remuneration 
Report, Corporate Governance Report and Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities), other than the financial 
statements and our auditor’s report thereon. The Directors are responsible for the other information contained 
within the annual report.

Our opinion on the financial statements does not cover the other information and, except to the extent otherwise 
explicitly stated in our report, we do not express any form of assurance conclusion thereon.

Our responsibility is to read the other information and, in doing so, consider whether the other information  
is materially inconsistent with the financial statements or our knowledge obtained in the course of the audit,  
or otherwise appears to be materially misstated.

If we identify such material inconsistencies or apparent material misstatements, we are required to determine 
whether this gives rise to a material misstatement in the financial statements themselves. If, based on the work  
we have performed, we conclude that there is a material misstatement of this other information, we are required 
to report that fact.

We have nothing to report in this regard.

9. Responsibilities of Directors
As explained more fully in the Directors’ responsibilities statement, the Directors are responsible for the 
preparation of the financial statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view, and for such 
internal control as the Directors determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that  
are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

In preparing the financial statements, the Directors are responsible for assessing the Group’s and the parent 
company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing as applicable, matters related to going concern and 
using the going concern basis of accounting unless the Directors either intend to liquidate the Group or the parent 
company or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

67

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

10. Auditor’s responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements
Our objectives are to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements as a whole are free 
from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error, and to issue an auditor’s report that includes our 
opinion. Reasonable assurance is a high level of assurance, but is not a guarantee that an audit conducted in 
accordance with ISAs (UK) will always detect a material misstatement when it exists. Misstatements can arise from 
fraud or error and are considered material if, individually or in the aggregate, they could reasonably be expected  
to influence the economic decisions of users taken on the basis of these financial statements.

A further description of our responsibilities for the audit of the financial statements is located on the FRC’s website 
at: www.frc.org.uk/auditorsresponsibilities. This description forms part of our auditor’s report.

11. Extent to which the audit was considered capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud
Irregularities, including fraud, are instances of non-compliance with laws and regulations. We design procedures in 
line with our responsibilities, outlined above, to detect material misstatements in respect of irregularities, including 
fraud. The extent to which our procedures are capable of detecting irregularities, including fraud is detailed below. 

11.1. Identifying and assessing potential risks related to irregularities
In identifying and assessing risks of material misstatement in respect of irregularities, including fraud and  
non-compliance with laws and regulations, we considered the following:

•  the nature of the industry and sector, control environment and business performance including the design of the 
Group’s remuneration policies, key drivers for Directors’ remuneration, bonus levels and performance targets;
•  results of our enquiries of management , internal audit, and the Audit Committee about their own identification 

and assessment of the risks of irregularities; 

•  any matters we identified having obtained and reviewed the Group’s documentation of their policies and 

procedures relating to:

–  identifying, evaluating and complying with laws and regulations and whether they were aware of any 

instances of non-compliance;

–  detecting and responding to the risks of fraud and whether they have knowledge of any actual, suspected  

or alleged fraud;

–  the internal controls established to mitigate risks of fraud or non-compliance with laws and regulations;
•  the matters discussed among the audit engagement team and relevant internal specialists, including valuations, 
pensions, and IT specialists regarding how and where fraud might occur in the financial statements and any 
potential indicators of fraud.

As a result of these procedures, we considered the opportunities and incentives that may exist within the organisation 
for fraud and identified the greatest potential for fraud in the valuation of trade receivables. In common with all audits 
under ISAs (UK), we are also required to perform specific procedures to respond to the risk of management override.

We also obtained an understanding of the legal and regulatory framework that the Group operates in, focusing  
on provisions of those laws and regulations that had a direct effect on the determination of material amounts and 
disclosures in the financial statements. The key laws and regulations we considered in this context included the UK 
Companies Act, UK Corporate Governance Code, Listing Rules, and Tax Law.

In addition, we considered provisions of other laws and regulations that do not have a direct effect on the financial 
statements but compliance with which may be fundamental to the Group’s ability to operate or to avoid a material 
penalty. This includes UK Employment and Labour Laws. 

11.2. Audit response to risks identified
As a result of performing the above, we identified valuation of trade receivables as a key audit matter related to  
the potential risk of fraud. The key audit matters section of our report explains the matter in more detail and also 
describes the specific procedures we performed in response to that key audit matter. 

In addition to the above, our procedures to respond to risks identified included the following:

•  reviewing the financial statement disclosures and testing to supporting documentation to assess compliance 
with provisions of relevant laws and regulations described as having a direct effect on the financial statements;

•  enquiring of management, the Audit Committee and external legal counsel concerning actual and potential 

litigation and claims;

•  performing analytical procedures to identify any unusual or unexpected relationships that may indicate risks  

of material misstatement due to fraud;

68   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
 
 
•  reading minutes of meetings of those charged with governance, reviewing internal audit reports and reviewing 

correspondence with HMRC; and

•  in addressing the risk of fraud through management override of controls, testing the appropriateness of journal 
entries and other adjustments; assessing whether the judgements made in making accounting estimates are 
indicative of a potential bias; and evaluating the business rationale of any significant transactions that are 
unusual or outside the normal course of business.

We also communicated relevant identified laws and regulations and potential fraud risks to all engagement team 
members including internal specialists, and remained alert to any indications of fraud or non-compliance with laws 
and regulations throughout the audit.

Report on other legal and regulatory requirements

12. Opinions on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006

In our opinion the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared  
in accordance with the Companies Act 2006.

In our opinion, based on the work undertaken in the course of the audit:

•  the information given in the strategic report and the Directors’ report for the financial year for which  

the financial statements are prepared is consistent with the financial statements; and

•  the strategic report and the Directors’ report have been prepared in accordance with applicable legal 

requirements.

In the light of the knowledge and understanding of the Group and the parent company and their environment 
obtained in the course of the audit, we have not identified any material misstatements in the strategic report  
or the Directors’ report.

13. Corporate Governance Statement
The Listing Rules require us to review the Directors' statement in relation to going concern, longer-term viability 
and that part of the Corporate Governance Statement relating to the Group’s compliance with the provisions of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code specified for our review.

Based on the work undertaken as part of our audit, we have concluded that each of the following elements of  
the Corporate Governance Statement is materially consistent with the financial statements and our knowledge 
obtained during the audit: 

•  the Directors’ statement with regards to the appropriateness of adopting the going concern basis of 

accounting and any material uncertainties identified set out on page 55;

•  the Directors’ explanation as to its assessment of the Group’s prospects, the period this assessment 

covers and why the period is appropriate set out on page 27;

•  the Directors' statement on fair, balanced and understandable set out on page 55;
•  the Board’s confirmation that it has carried out a robust assessment of the emerging and principal risks set 

out on page 20;

•  the section of the annual report that describes the review of effectiveness of risk management and internal 

control systems set out on page 61; and

•  the section describing the work of the Audit Committee set out on page 58.

69

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Independent auditor’s report to the  
members of Macfarlane Group PLC  
(continued)

14. Matters on which we are required to report by exception
14.1. Adequacy of explanations received and accounting records
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion:

•  we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit; or
•  adequate accounting records have not been kept by the parent company, or returns adequate for our audit  

have not been received from branches not visited by us; or

•  the parent company financial statements are not in agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

14.2. Directors’ remuneration
Under the Companies Act 2006 we are also required to report if in our opinion certain disclosures of Directors’ 
remuneration have not been made or the part of the Directors’ remuneration report to be audited is not in 
agreement with the accounting records and returns.

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

15. Other matters which we are required to address
15.1. Auditor tenure
Following the recommendation of the Audit Committee, we were appointed by Board of Directors on 12 July  
2019 to audit the financial statements of the Group for the period ending 31 December 2019 and subsequent 
financial periods. 

The period of total uninterrupted engagement including previous renewals and reappointments of the firm  
is 2 years, covering the years ending 31 December 2019 to 31 December 2020.

15.2. Consistency of the audit report with the additional report to the Audit Committee
Our audit opinion is consistent with the additional report to the Audit Committee we are required to provide  
in accordance with ISAs (UK).

16. Use of our report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the 
Companies Act 2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members 
those matters we are required to state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest 
extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the 
Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the opinions we have formed.

David Sweeney CA
For and on behalf of Deloitte LLP 
Statutory Auditor 
Glasgow, United Kingdom

25 February 2021

70   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
Consolidated income statement
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Continuing operations
Revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Distribution costs
Administrative expenses

Operating profit
Finance costs

Profit before tax
Tax

Profit for the year

Earnings per share

Basic

Diluted

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Items that may be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Foreign currency translation differences
Items that will not be reclassified subsequently to profit or loss
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax recognised in other comprehensive income
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Other comprehensive income for the year
Profit for the year

Total comprehensive income for the year

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

Note

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

1

2
4

5

230,029
153,483

225,246
153,256

76,546
8,429
53,748

14,369
1,367

13,002
2,831

71,990
8,441
50,062

13,487
1,625

11,862
2,262

6,20

10,171

9,600

8

Note

20

24

18

6.45p

6.42p

6.09p

6.07p

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

60

2,112

(401)
129

(62)

537

(92)
–

1,900
10,171

383
9,600

12,071

9,983

71

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Consolidated statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Revaluation
reserve
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Note

Restated*
Retained
earnings
£000

Restated*
Total
£000

At 1 January 2019

39,387

12,975

70

293

9,404

62,129

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Foreign currency translation differences
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability

20
24
18

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments
Issue of share capital

Total transactions with shareholders

7
25
19,20

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
66

66

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
173

173

–
–
–
–

–

–
–
–

–

–
(62)
–
–

(62)

9,600
–
537
(92)

10,045

9,600
(62)
537
(92)

9,983

–
–
–

–

(3,689)
75
–

(3,614)

(3,689)
75
239

(3,375)

At 31 December 2019

39,453

13,148

70

231

15,835

68,737

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Foreign currency translation differences
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

20
24
18
18

7
25

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
60
–
–
–

60

–
–

–

10,171
–
2,112
(401)
129

10,171
60
2,112
(401)
129

12,011

12,071

(1,105)
75

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

(1,030)

At 31 December 2020

39,453

13,148

70

291

26,816

79,778

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

72   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Consolidated balance sheet
At 31 December 2020

Non-current assets
Goodwill and other intangible assets
Property, plant and equipment
Right-of-use assets
Trade and other receivables
Deferred tax assets

Total non-current assets

Current assets
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

Current liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities
Bank borrowings

Total current liabilities

Net current assets/(liabilities)

Non-current liabilities
Retirement benefit obligations
Deferred tax liabilities
Trade and other payables
Provisions
Lease liabilities

Total non-current liabilities

Total liabilities

Net assets

Equity
Share capital
Share premium
Revaluation reserve
Translation reserve
Retained earnings

Total equity

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

The financial statements of Macfarlane Group PLC, Company registration number SC004221,  
were approved by the Board of Directors on 25 February 2021 and signed on its behalf by

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

Note

10
11
12
14
18

13
14
15

2020 
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

60,598
8,640
28,584
35
396

98,253

15,858
51,371
7,228

74,457

62,663
9,621
25,855
35
1,224

99,398

15,813
52,044
5,579

73,436

1

172,710

172,834

16
21

17
15

24
18
16
21
17

1

1

19
20
20
20
20

47,755
1,834
1,731
5,784
7,766

64,870

48,530
660
1,084
6,321
18,253

74,848

9,587

(1,412)

1,471
3,072
19
592
22,908

6,465
3,116
22
–
19,646

28,062

29,249

92,932

104,097

79,778

68,737

39,453
13,148
70
291
26,816

79,778

39,453
13,148
70
231
15,835

68,737

73

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
 
 
 
Consolidated cash flow statement
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Profit before tax
Adjustments for:
Amortisation of intangible assets
Depreciation of tangible assets
Depreciation of right-of-use assets
Loss on disposal of property, plant and equipment
Share-based payment expense
Finance costs

Note

2020 
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

13,002

11,862

2,520
1,719
6,740
30
75
1,342

2,391
1,593
6,223
5
75
1,606

Operating cash flows before movements in working capital

25,428

23,755

Decrease in inventories
Decrease in receivables
Increase/(decrease) in payables
Increase in provisions
Pension scheme contributions (less current service cost) 

Cash generated from operations
Income taxes paid
Interest paid

Net cash inflow from operating activities 

Investing activities
Acquisitions
Proceeds from disposal of property, plant and equipment
Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Cash outflow from investing activities

Financing activities
Dividends paid
Repayment of bank borrowing facility
Repayment of lease obligations

Cash outflow from financing activities

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

161
955
965
1,766
(2,981)

26,294
(1,728)
(1,243)

23,323

(2,661)
102
(804)

(3,363)

(1,105)
(10,225)
(6,719)

(18,049)

1,911
3,310

5,221

2,006
1,178
(1,445)
660
(2,994)

23,160
(2,288)
(1,375)

19,497

(6,162)
185
(2,648)

(8,625)

(3,689)
(1,785)
(6,699)

(12,173)

(1,301)
4,611

3,310

23

7

There is no material impact of foreign exchange rate differences on the cash and cash equivalents balance at the end of the 
current or preceding financial year.

Reconciliation to consolidated cash flow statement
Cash and cash equivalents per the consolidated balance sheet
Bank overdraft

Balances per consolidated cash flow statement

2020 
£000

2019
£000

7,228
(2,007)

5,221

5,579
(2,269)

3,310

Bank overdrafts are included in cash and cash equivalents because they form an integral part of the Group’s cash management.

74   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Accounting policies
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Basis of preparation
Macfarlane Group PLC is a public company listed on the London Stock Exchange (’the Company’), incorporated and domiciled  
in the United Kingdom and registered in Scotland. The Company’s registered office is 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE.

Basis of accounting
The principal activities of the Company and its subsidiaries (’the Group’) and the nature of the Group’s operations are set out  
in the strategic report on pages 4 to 35. The 2020 financial statements have been prepared in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. These consolidated financial statements are 
presented in Sterling, which is the Company’s functional currency. All amounts have been rounded to the nearest thousand, 
unless otherwise indicated.

The financial statements have been prepared on the historical cost basis. The revaluation reserve relates to a period before 
transition to IFRS.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration of going concern, have reviewed the Group’s future cash flow forecasts and profit 
projections, which they believe are based on an appropriate assessment of the market and past experience. The Group’s 
business activities, together with the factors likely to affect its future development, performance and financial position are  
set out in the Strategic Report on pages 4 to 35.

The Group’s principal financial risks in the medium term relate to liquidity and credit risk. Liquidity risk is managed by ensuring 
that the Group’s day-to-day working capital requirements are met by having access to banking facilities with suitable terms 
and conditions to accommodate the requirements of the Group’s operations. The Group has a committed borrowing facility 
of £30 million with Lloyds Banking Group PLC in place until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial 
rates and carries standard financial covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over trade receivables. 
Credit risk is mitigated by applying considerable rigour in managing the Group’s trade receivables. The Directors believe  
that the Group is adequately placed to manage its financial risks effectively, despite any economic uncertainty.

The Directors are of the opinion that the Group’s cash flow forecasts and profit projections, which they believe are based on a 
prudent assessment of the market and past experience taking account of reasonably possible changes in trading performance 
given current market and economic conditions, show that the Group should be able to operate within the current facility and 
comply with its banking covenants. As a consequence of the Covid-19 pandemic the Directors have modelled a range of scenarios, 
including a central case, a downside scenario, a severe but plausible downside and a reverse stress test, over a three-year horizon. 
Details are set out in the Viability statement review on page 27.

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company and the Group have adequate resources 
to continue in operational existence for a period extending at least the next twelve months from the date of approval of these 
financial statements. For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis in preparing the financial statements.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts 
reported for assets and liabilities as at the balance sheet date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during  
the year. Due to the nature of estimation, the actual outcomes may well differ from these estimates.

Critical judgements
No significant critical judgements have been made in the current or prior year.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The key sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant effect on the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities 
 are discussed below:

Retirement benefit obligations 
The determination of any defined benefit pension scheme liability is based on assumptions determined with independent 
actuarial advice. The key assumptions used include discount rate, inflation rate and mortality assumptions, for which a 
sensitivity analysis is provided in note 24. The Directors consider that those sensitivities represent reasonable sensitivities 
which could occur in the next financial year.

Valuation of trade receivables 
The provision held against trade receivables is based on applying an expected credit loss model and related estimates of 
recoverable amounts, as detailed in note 14. Whilst every attempt is made to ensure that the provision held against doubtful 
trade receivables is as accurate as possible, there remains a risk that the provision may not match the level of debt which 
ultimately proves uncollectable. For illustration only an increase in the average default rate of overdue trade receivables from 
0.97% to 2.35% above the historic loss rates observed would lead to an increase of £650,000 in the provision required.

75

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Alternative performance measures 
In measuring the financial performance and position, the financial measures used in certain limited cases include those which 
have been derived from the reported results in order to eliminate factors which due to their unusual nature and size distort 
year-on-year comparisons to a material extent and/or provide useful information to stakeholders. Where such items arise,  
the Directors will classify such items as separately disclosed non-recurring items and provide details of these items to enable 
users of the accounts to understand the impact on the financial statements.

To the extent that measurements under Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (’GAAP’) are adjusted for separately 
disclosed non-recurring items, these are referred to as Alternative Performance Measures (’APMs’). We believe that these 
APMs, and the comparable GAAP measurements provide a useful basis for measuring the financial performance and position.

There were no separately disclosed non-recurring items in either these financial statements or in the financial statements  
for the preceding year.

Changes in accounting policies in 2020
There are no new accounting policies applied in 2020 which have had a material effect on these accounts. In addition, the 
Directors do not consider that the adoption of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB in 2020  
has had any material impact on the financial statements of the Group.

New accounting standards and interpretations
The Group is currently assessing the potential impact of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB  
that will be effective from 1 January 2021. None of these have been adopted early.

IFRS 17 
IFRS 10 and IAS 28 (amendments) 
Amendments to IAS 1 
Amendments to IFRS 3 
Amendments to IAS16 
Amendments to IAS 37  
Annual Improvements to IFRS  
 Standards 2018-2020 cycle 

Insurance Contracts 
Sale or Contribution of Assets between an Investor and its Associate or Joint Venture 
Classification of Liabilities as Current or Non-current 
Reference to the Conceptual Framework 
Property, Plant and Equipment – Proceeds before Intended Use 
Onerous Contracts – Cost of Fulfilling a Contract 
IFRS 9 Financial Instruments, IFRS 16 Leases 

The Directors do not expect that the adoption of the Standards listed above will have a material impact on the financial 
statements of the Group in future periods.

Restatement due to prior period adjustments
As part of the Group’s preparations to mitigate Brexit-related risks, the Group undertook an exercise to review duty and tariff 
arrangements for all imports and exports to and from all countries, both within and outwith the EU. This review, which was 
completed in December 2020, uncovered one product area in the Manufacturing Operations segment where the Group, in 
conjunction with its customers, had applied an incorrect duty code on certain exported items. It was confirmed that this error 
had originated in prior years. Working with the customers concerned, the Group agreed that the error should be rectified 
forthwith and all arrears of duty including interest, should be paid.

In addition to rectifying the specific error identified, the Group undertook a further review of all imports and exports to confirm 
that there was no risk of any similar instances. This was concluded satisfactorily, and no other such errors were identified. 

The Group’s share of the estimated value of £697,000 after tax has been fully provided for at 31 December 2020 (notes 18 and 
21), with £534,000 recognised as a prior period adjustment being £143,000 deducted from 2019 sales, £19,000 added to interest, 
£31,000 deducted from the 2019 tax charge and £403,000 relating to earlier years recorded as a reduction in Retained earnings 
at 1 January 2019. 

These adjustments have been recognised as prior year errors in accordance with IAS 8 ‘Accounting policies, changes in 
accounting estimates and errors’ within these Financial Statements and restated accordingly. The impact of the restatements  
on the affected primary statement line items is shown in the tables on the following page.

76   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Restatement due to prior period adjustments

Restatement in prior periods to 31 December 2019

Consolidated income statement
Revenue
Gross profit
Operating profit
Finance costs
Profit before tax
Tax
Profit for the year

Consolidated statement of other comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Total comprehensive income for the year

Consolidated balance sheet
Current liabilities – provisions
Deferred tax liabilities
Net assets
Retained earnings
Total equity

Consolidated cash flow
Profit before tax
Operating cash flows before movements in working capital
Decrease in payables
Cash generated from operations

Consolidated statement of changes in equity
At 1 January 2019
Profit for the year
At 31 December 2019

As 
previously
 reported
£000

Adjustment
 to retained
 earnings
£000

Adjusted
 (2019
 impact)
£000

As 
restated
£000

225,389
72,133
13,630
(1,606)
12,024
(2,293)
9,731

9,731
10,114

–
(3,242)
69,271
16,369
69,271

12,024
23,917
(947)
23,160

9,807
9,731
16,369

–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

(498)
95
(403)
(403)
(403)

–
–
–
–

(403)
–
(403)

(143) 225,246
71,990
(143)
13,487
(143)
(1,625)
(19)
11,862
(162)
(2,262)
31
9,600
(131)

(131)
(131)

9,600
9,983

(162)
31
(131)
(131)
(131)

(162)
(162)
162
–

–
(131)
(131)

(660)
(3,116)
68,737
15,835
68,737

11,862
23,755
(785)
23,160

9,404
9,600
15,835

All headings and numbers throughout the Report and Financial Statements that are marked as ’Restated*’ reflect the restatements 
for these prior period adjustments as set out above. All restatements relate to the Manufacturing Operations segment.

In addition, the Group has previously offset certain cash balances against bank borrowings which, whilst in line with the Group’s 
legal right of offset, did not reflect any short-term intention to offset the liabilities after the balance sheet dates as required by 
IAS 32. Accordingly, £2,269,000 has been added to cash balances and bank borrowings respectively in 2019 and there has been  
no impact on the income statement or on net assets.

Summary of significant accounting policies
The following accounting policies have been applied consistently for items which are considered to be material in relation  
to the financial statements.

The consolidated financial statements include the financial statements of the parent company and its subsidiaries, all of which 
are wholly-owned, to the end of the financial year. The Group does not have any associates or other joint arrangements as 
defined by IFRS 10 ’Consolidated Financial Statements’.

(a) Basis of consolidation
Subsidiaries
Subsidiaries are entities controlled by the Group. Control exists when the Group is exposed to, or has rights to, variable returns 
from its involvement with the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity. In assessing 
control, the Group takes into consideration potential voting rights. The acquisition date is the date on which control is 
transferred to the acquirer.

77

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

(a) Basis of consolidation (continued)
The financial statements of subsidiaries are included in the consolidated financial statements from the date that control 
commences until the date that control ceases. Losses applicable to the non-controlling interests in a subsidiary are allocated  
to the non-controlling interests even if doing so causes the non-controlling interests to have a deficit balance.

Business combinations
The acquisition of subsidiaries is accounted for under the acquisition method. The acquired business is measured at the effective 
date of acquisition, defined as the date control is acquired, as the aggregate fair value of assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities 
as required under IFRS 3 ’Business Combinations’. Any excess of the cost of acquisition over the fair value of the separately 
identifiable net assets of the acquired business is represented as goodwill. Contingent consideration classified as a liability  
will be subsequently re-measured through the consolidated income statement.

The results of subsidiaries acquired or disposed of during the period are included in the consolidated income statement from 
the effective date of acquisition or up to the effective date of disposal. The consolidated gain or loss on disposal of a subsidiary  
is the difference between the net proceeds of sale and the Group's share of the subsidiary's net assets together with the 
carrying value of any related goodwill at the effective date of disposal.

Transactions eliminated on consolidation
Intra-Group balances and transactions, and any unrealised income and expenses arising from intra-Group transactions,  
are eliminated on consolidation.

(b) Goodwill and other intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill arising on a business combination is recognised as an asset and represents the excess of the cost of acquisition over 
the net fair values of the separately identifiable assets and liabilities of the acquired business or subsidiary at the effective date 
of acquisition. Where the cost of an acquisition includes contingent consideration, this is based on our best assessment of the 
likely level of deferred consideration payable based on the conditions and information available at the time of approving the 
financial statements.

Goodwill is allocated to cash generating units (’CGUs’) expected to benefit from the synergies of the combination, for the 
purpose of impairment testing. The carrying value of goodwill for each CGU is not amortised but is considered annually and 
also reviewed where management has reason to believe that a change in circumstances may give rise to any impairment or 
more frequently when there is an indication that the unit may be impaired. If the recoverable amount of the cash-generating 
unit is less than the carrying amount of the unit, the impairment loss is allocated first to reduce the carrying amount of any 
goodwill allocated to the unit and then to the other assets of the unit pro-rata on the basis of the carrying amount of each 
asset in the unit. An impairment loss recognised for goodwill is not reversed in a subsequent period.

Other intangible assets
Other intangible assets comprise separately identifiable intangible assets recognised on the acquisitions of businesses or 
subsidiary companies. They are recorded at fair value on acquisition less any amortisation and subsequent impairment. These 
are primarily Brand values, which are calculated on the Relief from Royalty method, and Customer relationship values, which 
are calculated on the Excess Earnings method based on the net anticipated earnings stream. Brand values are amortised on  
a straight-line basis of up to five years and Customer relationships are amortised on a straight-line basis over ten years.

Impairment
The carrying values of the Group’s assets are reviewed annually to determine if there is any indication of impairment. If any 
such indication exists, the assets’ recoverable values are calculated as the present value of the estimated future cash flows, 
discounted at appropriate pre-tax discount rates. Impairment losses are recognised when the carrying value of an asset or 
CGU exceeds recoverable value. Impairment losses are recognised in the consolidated income statement.

(c) Revenue recognition
The Group is engaged in the delivery of packaging materials, packing machinery, labels and labels machinery to customers. 
Revenue is not recognised if there is significant uncertainty regarding the recovery of the revenue consideration. Revenue 
represents amounts receivable for goods provided to third parties in the normal course of business, net of discounts, 
customer rebates, VAT and other sales related taxes.
IFRS 15 ’Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ requires the Group to apportion revenues from customer contracts to 
separate performance obligations and recognise revenues as each performance obligation is satisfied. The Group has 
reviewed its arrangements with customers and concluded that the Group’s revenue is generated from the delivery of the 
goods to customers and that this represents a single performance obligation. The Group does not enter into any repurchase 
agreements. It is therefore appropriate to recognise revenue at the point of transfer of goods to the customer, consistent  
with the revenue recognition framework in IFRS 15.

78   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

(d) Leasing
The Group recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is the  
lessee, except for short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low value assets 
below £4,000. For these short-term or low value leases, the Group recognises the lease payments as an operating expense 
disclosed in administrative expenses on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

The lease liability is initially measured at the present value of lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date, 
discounted using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the Group uses appropriate 
incremental borrowing rates.

Lease liabilities are presented on two separate lines in the balance sheet for amounts due within one year and amounts due 
beyond one year. The lease liability is subsequently measured by increasing the carrying amount to reflect interest on the lease 
liability (using the effective interest method) and by reducing the liability by payments made. The Company remeasures the 
lease liability (and adjusts the related right-of-use asset) whenever the lease term has changed or a lease contract is modified 
and the modification is not accounted for as a separate lease.

Right-of-use (’ROU’) assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability and are subsequently 
measured at cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. ROU assets are depreciated over the shorter period  
of lease term and useful life of the underlying asset. If a lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset or the cost of the 
ROU asset reflects that the Company expects to exercise a purchase option, the related ROU asset is depreciated over the 
useful life of the asset. Depreciation starts on the commencement date of the lease.

As a practical expedient, IFRS 16 permits a lessee not to separate non-lease components, and instead account for any lease and 
associated non-lease components as a single arrangement. The Company has not used this practical expedient and has separated 
out the non-lease components for its leases. These non-lease components, typically servicing and maintenance costs, have been 
recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis and disclosed in administrative expenses in the consolidated income statement.

The Group’s incremental borrowing rates applied to lease liabilities in 2020 ranged between 2.75% and 4.00%, with the average 
rate applied across all leases being 3.02%.

ROU assets will be tested for impairment in accordance with IAS 36 Impairment of Assets.

Movements in ROU assets and lease liabilities and are set out in note 12 and note 17 respectively.

(e) Foreign currencies
Transactions in foreign currencies are translated to the respective functional currencies of Group entities at the foreign 
exchange rate ruling at the date of the transaction. Monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies at the 
balance sheet date are retranslated to the functional currency at the exchange rate ruling at that date. Foreign exchange 
differences arising on translation are recognised in the consolidated income statement. Non-monetary assets and liabilities, 
measured at historical cost in a foreign currency, are translated using the exchange rates at the date of the transaction. 
Non-monetary assets and liabilities, stated at fair value in a foreign currency, are retranslated to the functional currency  
at the exchange rates ruling at the dates the fair value was determined.

Assets and liabilities of foreign operations, including goodwill and fair value adjustments arising on consolidation, are translated 
to the Group’s presentational currency, Sterling, at the exchange rates ruling at the balance sheet date. Revenues and expenses 
of foreign operations are translated at an average rate for the year where this rate approximates to the exchange rates ruling at 
the dates of the transactions. Exchange differences arising from the translation of foreign operations are reported as an item 
of other comprehensive income and accumulated in the translation reserve.

(f) Retirement benefits
Defined contribution schemes
A defined contribution scheme is a post-employment benefit scheme under which the Company pays fixed contributions  
into a separate entity and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions  
to defined contribution pension schemes are recognised as an expense in the consolidated income statement in the periods 
during which services are rendered by employees.

Defined benefit schemes
A defined benefit scheme is a post-employment benefit scheme other than a defined contribution scheme. The Group’s  
net retirement benefit obligation in respect of its defined benefit pension scheme is calculated by estimating the amount of 
future benefits that employees have earned in return for their service in current and prior periods. These benefits are then 
discounted to determine the present value, and the fair values of any scheme investments, at bid price, are deducted. The net 
interest on the net retirement benefit obligation for the year is calculated by applying the discount rate used to measure the 
defined benefit obligation at the beginning of the year.

79

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Accounting policies (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

(f) Retirement benefits (continued)
The discount rate is the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of at least AA that have maturity dates 
approximating to the average duration of the Group’s retirement benefit obligations and that are denominated in the currency 
in which the benefits are expected to be paid.

Remeasurements arising from defined benefit plans comprise actuarial gains and losses, returns on plan assets (excluding 
interest) and the effect of the asset ceiling (if any, excluding interest). Remeasurements are recognised in the statement  
of other comprehensive income and all other expenses related to defined benefit schemes charged in staff costs in the 
consolidated income statement.

When the benefits of a scheme are changed, or when a scheme is curtailed, the portion of the changed benefit related to past 
service by employees, or the gain or loss on curtailment, is recognised immediately in the consolidated income statement 
when the scheme amendment or curtailment occurs.

The calculation of the retirement benefit obligations is performed by a qualified actuary using the projected unit credit method. 
When the calculation results in a benefit to the Group, the recognised asset is limited to the present value of benefits available 
in the form of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions and takes into account the adverse effect 
of the present value of any minimum funding requirements.

The Group’s defined benefit pension scheme covers the Group companies at December 2002. The net defined benefit cost  
of the scheme is apportioned to these participating entities based on the employment history of scheme members, who are 
allocated to the relevant subsidiary, with any remaining members allocated to the parent company.

(g) Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax.

Current tax is payable based on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from profit before tax as reported in the 
consolidated income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years 
and excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The current tax liability is calculated using tax rates that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date and any adjustments in respect of prior years.

Deferred tax balances represent the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts 
of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit 
and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is 
realised based on tax laws and rates that have been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the consolidated income statement, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive 
income, in which case the deferred tax is also recorded in the consolidated statement of other comprehensive income.

(h) Property, plant and equipment
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost, with assets revalued before the date of transition to IFRS recorded at 
deemed cost.

No depreciation is provided on land. Depreciation is recognised so as to write off the cost of the property, plant and  
equipment, less their estimated residual values, by equal annual instalments over their estimated useful lives. The rates of 
depreciation use the straight-line method and vary between 2% and 5% per annum on buildings and 7% and 33% per annum  
on plant and equipment. Rates of depreciation are reviewed annually to ensure they remain relevant and residual values are 
reviewed to ensure they remain appropriate once in each calendar year.

(i) Inventories
Inventories are consistently stated at the lower of cost and net realisable value. Cost represents purchase price. In the case of 
work in progress and finished goods, cost comprises direct materials, direct labour costs and attributable overheads that have 
been incurred in bringing the inventories to their present location and condition. Net realisable value is based on the estimated 
selling price, less any further costs expected to be incurred to completion and disposal. Inventories are stated less provisions 
required for slow-moving and obsolete items, where appropriate.

80   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

(j) Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised in the Group’s balance sheet when the Group becomes a party to the 
contractual provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets categorised as investments, comprise investments in debt and equity securities and are initially recognised  
at fair value with any subsequent gains or losses recognised in the consolidated income statement.

Other financial assets comprise trade and other receivables that have fixed or determinable recoveries. The classification 
takes account of the nature and purpose of the financial assets and is determined on initial recognition. Trade and other 
receivables are measured at amortised cost less impairment under the Expected Credit Loss (’ECL’) model.

Indicators are assessed for the impairment of financial assets at each balance sheet date. Financial assets are impaired when 
there is objective evidence that as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the financial 
asset, the estimated future cash flows have been impacted. For trade receivables the amount of the impairment is the 
difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows.

The carrying amount of the financial asset is reduced by the impairment loss directly for all financial assets with the exception of 
trade receivables where the carrying amount is measured on an expected credit loss model at inception rather than an incurred loss 
model. When a trade receivable is uncollectible, it is written off against the provision made on inception or at a previous reporting 
period end. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited against the provision. In accordance with IFRS 9 
’Financial Instruments’ changes in the carrying value of the provision are recognised in the consolidated income statement.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on demand deposits, readily convertible to a known amount of cash 
and are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value.

Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified as either financial liabilities or as equity in accordance with the 
substance of the contractual arrangements.

Financial liabilities comprise solely other financial liabilities under the terms of IFRS 7. Financial liabilities, including borrowings, 
are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs. Other financial liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised 
cost, with interest expense measured on an effective yield basis.

Equity instruments are any contracts evidencing a residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all of  
its liabilities. Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative financial instruments were not used in the current or preceding financial year.

(k) Provisions
Property provisions
The Group has a number of property leases. Under IAS 37 an entity must recognise a provision if a present obligation has 
arisen as a result of a past event, payment is probable and the amount can be estimated reliably. Where it is probable at the 
balance sheet date, that there is a liability in respect of restoring the property to its original condition a provision is made for 
management’s best estimate of the cost of fulfilling any residual repairing obligation for that property lease.

The Group may make the determination to exit a property lease before the expiry date, when it does not have a commercial 
rationale to continue to occupy the property. In this case the Group could have surplus properties and it would seek to attract  
a new tenant to obtain rental income from a sub-lease to cover its ongoing liabilities under the remaining period of the head 
lease. If there is likely to be a rental void for a period of time, then a provision is made at each balance sheet date to cover 
management’s best estimate of the future cost of the likely void period.

Other provisions
The Group has made provision for sums due to customers in respect of backdated duty including interest.

(l)  Share-based payments
The grant date fair value of share-based payments awards granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, with a 
corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the awards. The fair 
value of the awards granted is measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon 
which the awards were granted. The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for 
which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised 
as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the 
vesting date. For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the share-based payment 
is measured to reflect such conditions and there is no true-up for differences between expected and actual outcomes.

Details of the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based transactions are set out in note 25.

81

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements
For the year ended 31 December 2020

1. Business and geographical segments
(a) Business segments
The Group’s principal business segment is Packaging Distribution, comprising the distribution of packaging materials and supply 
of storage and warehousing services in the UK. This comprises over 85% of Group revenue and profit. The Group’s Manufacturing 
Operations segment comprises the design, manufacture and assembly of timber, corrugated and foam-based packaging 
materials in the UK, the design, manufacture and supply of self-adhesive labels to a variety of FMCG customers in the UK & Europe 
and the design, manufacture and supply of resealable labels to a variety of FMCG customers in the UK, Europe and the USA. 
None of the business segments within Manufacturing Operations represents more than 10% of Group revenue or profit.

External revenues from major products and services

Packaging Distribution
Design, manufacture and assembly of timber, corrugated and foam-based packaging materials 
Manufacture and supply of self-adhesive labels
Manufacture and supply of resealable labels and related machinery

External revenues from Continuing operations

2020
£000

201,739
8,488
9,503
10,299

230,029

Restated*
2019
£000

196,706
10,642
9,148
8,750

225,246

(b) Segmental information

Revenue
Total revenue
Inter-segment revenue

External revenue
Cost of sales

Gross profit
Net operating expenses

Operating profit

Net finance costs

Profit before tax
Tax

Profit for the year

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2020
Total
£000

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Restated*
Manufacturing
Operations
£000

Restated*
2019
Total
£000

196,706
–

196,706
135,525

61,181
48,775

12,406

33,873
5,333

28,540
17,731

10,809
9,728

1,081

201,739
–

201,739
136,177

65,562
51,574

13,988

33,543
5,253

28,290
17,306

10,984
10,603

381

235,282
5,253

230,029
153,483

76,546
62,177

14,369

1,367

13,002
2,831

10,171

Inter-segment revenues are charged at prevailing market prices. 

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2020
Total
£000

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Restated*
Manufacturing
Operations
£000

230,579
5,333

225,246
153,256

71,990
58,503

13,487

1,625

11,862
2,262

9,600

Restated*
2019
Total
£000

13,879

10,212

842

827

3,154

10,979

12,074

9,179

1,805

1,033

20,438
(12,456)

172,710
(92,932)

153,384
(92,777)

19,450
(11,320)

172,834
(104,097)

7,982

79,778

60,607

8,130

68,737

Capital additions

Depreciation/amortisation

Segment assets
Segment liabilities

Net assets

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

2,312

10,152

152,272
(80,476)

71,796

82   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
 
(c) Geographical segments
The Group’s operations are primarily located in the UK and Europe.

Packaging Distribution activities are primarily in the UK.

Within Manufacturing Operations, the Packaging Design and Manufacture business operates primarily in the UK and the 
Labels businesses operate in the UK, Europe and through distributors in the USA.

Continuing operations
Europe
£000

UK
£000

2020 
Total
£000

Restated*
Continuing operations

UK
£000

Europe
£000

External revenue

Operating profit

Non-current assets

Capital additions

219,873

10,156

230,029

219,167

13,260

95,839

3,106

1,109

2,414

48

14,369

98,253

3,154

13,027

89,719

12,994

6,079

460

9,679

885

Restated*
2019
Total
£000

225,246

13,487

99,398

13,879

(d) Information about major customers
No single customer accounts for more than 10% of the Group’s external revenues. Customer dependencies are regularly 
monitored.

2. Operating profit

Operating profit has been arrived at after charging:

Cost of inventories recognised as an expense in the consolidated income statement
Amortisation of other intangible assets (note 10)
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment (note 11)
Depreciation of right-of-use assets (note 12)
Acquisition related costs
Staff costs (note 3)

The detailed analysis of auditor’s remuneration is provided below:

Audit services
Fees payable to the auditor for the audit of these financial statements
Fees payable to auditor for the audit of the Company’s subsidiaries

Total audit fees

Non-audit services
IFRS 16 project set-up costs
Other assurance services for the audit of the Company pension scheme

Total non-audit fees

Total fees paid to auditor

2020
£000

2019
£000

149,218
2,520
1,719
6,740
19
35,027

149,014
2,391
1,598
6,223
97
34,937

44
140

184

–
11

11

46
128

174

25
11

36

195

210

IFRS 16 project set-up costs were incurred in advance Deloitte LLP’s appointment as auditor in 2019. The project was 
terminated on Deloitte’s appointment and no reliance placed on the work in the 2019 financial statements. A new provider  
was engaged who has supported the Group with its IFRS 16 work in 2019 and 2020.

The Audit Committee reviews and approves non-audit work which the auditor performs, including the fees paid for such work, 
to ensure that the auditor’s objectivity and independence is not compromised.

83

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

3. Staff costs

The average monthly number of employees (including Directors) was:

Production
Sales and distribution
Administration

The costs incurred in respect of these employees were:

Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Pension costs
 Contributions to defined contribution schemes
 Contributions to defined benefit schemes
Share-based payments (note 25)

4. Finance costs

Interest on bank borrowings
Interest on leases
Finance cost relating to defined benefit scheme (note 24)
Other interest

Finance costs

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

5. Tax

Current tax 
United Kingdom corporation tax 
Foreign tax
Adjustments in respect of prior years

Current tax charge

Deferred tax
Current year
Adjustments in respect of prior years
Change in corporation tax rate

Deferred tax charge (note 18)

Total tax charge

The standard rate of tax, based on the UK average rate of corporation tax is 19%.

Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in these jurisdictions.

84   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

2020
No.

179
485
246

910

2020
£000

30,124
2,928

1,670
230
75

2019
No.

190
496
247

933

2019
£000

30,311
2,860

1,579
112
75

35,027

34,937

2020
£000

482
761
99
25

Restated*
2019
£000

573
802
231
19

1,367

1,625

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

2,343
121
(90)

2,374

37
53
367

457

2,057
104
(53)

2,108

154
–
–

154

2,831

2,262

 
The actual tax charge varies from the standard rate of tax on the results in the consolidated income statement for the reasons 
set out below.

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

Profit before tax

Tax on profit at 19% (2019: 19%)

Factors affecting tax charge for the year:
Change in rate for deferred tax from 17% to 19%
Non-deductible expenses
Difference on overseas tax rates
Utilisation of tax losses not previously recognised
Changes in estimates related to prior years

Tax charge for the year

Weighted average effective tax rate for the year

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

13,002

11,862

2,470

2,254

367
107
(18)
(58)
(37)

–
47
14
–
(53)

2,831

2,262

21.8%

19.1%

Macfarlane Group’s corporate tax structure is such that the effective corporation tax rate should be relatively close to the 
prevailing tax rate with non-deductible expenses usually the principal reason for any variation.

Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2020 have been calculated based on a long-term corporation tax rate of 19%, 
which had been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. This changed from 17% effective from 1 April 2020.

6. Profit for the year
The Company has taken advantage of Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006 and consequently a separate profit and loss 
account for the parent company is not presented as part of these financial statements.

The Company’s profit for the year is disclosed in note 37 to these financial statements.

7. Dividends

Amounts recognised as distributions to equity holders in the year:
Final dividend for 2019 of Nil p per share (2018: 1.65p per share)
Interim dividend for 2020 of 0.70p per share (2019: 0.69p per share)

2020
£000

2019
£000

–
1,105

1,105

2,600
1,089

3,689

As part of the steps taken by the Company to preserve cash resources at the outbreak of the Covid-19 pandemic in the first 
quarter of 2020, the Directors made the decision to cancel the final dividend for 2019 of 1.76p per share due for payment in 
June 2020.

A proposed final dividend of 1.85p per share will be paid on 3 June 2021 to shareholders on the register at 14 May 2021.  
This is subject to approval by shareholders at the Annual General Meeting on 11 May 2021 and therefore is not included  
as a liability in these financial statements.

85

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

8. Earnings per share

Earnings for the purposes of calculating earnings per share
Profit for the year

Number of shares in issue

Weighted average number of ordinary shares to calculate basic earnings per share
Dilutive effect of Long-Term Incentive Plan awards in issue

Weighted average number of ordinary shares to calculate diluted earnings per share

Basic earnings per share

Diluted earnings per share

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

10,171

9,600

2020
Number of
shares
‘000

157,812
703

158,515

2019
Number of
shares
‘000

157,636
393

158,029

6.45p

6.09p

6.42p

6.07p

9. Subsidiary companies
Subsidiary companies, with names, countries of incorporation and registered offices, are shown on page 120.

The Group has agreed to exempt the two companies, Harrison’s Packaging Limited (Company number 06999588) and Leyland 
Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited (Company number 03775077) from the provisions of the Companies Act relating to the 
audit of individual accounts by virtue of section 479A.

This is on the basis that the trade and assets of both companies will be hived up into the major trading company Macfarlane 
Group (UK) Limited (’MGUK’) during 2021.

86   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

10. Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill
Other intangible assets

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill

Fair value on acquisition
At 1 January 
Additions (note 23)

At 31 December

Accumulated impairment losses
At 1 January and 31 December

Carrying value
At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2019

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

44,108
15,131

59,239

1,359
–

1,359

2020
Total
£000

45,467
15,131

60,598

Packaging
Distribution
£000

Manufacturing
Operations
£000

2020
Total
£000

43,944
164

44,108

1,359
–

1,359

45,303
164

45,467

2019
Total
£000

45,303
17,360

62,663

2019
Total
£000

42,210
3,093

45,303

–

–

–

–

44,108

1,359

45,467

43,944

1,359

45,303

On 6 January 2020, the Group’s major trading subsidiary, MGUK, acquired the trade and selected assets of the packaging 
business known as Armagrip. Goodwill arising on this acquisition was added to the Packaging Distribution CGU. During 2019 
the Group acquired the whole issued share capital of Carnweather, the intermediate parent and 100% owner of Ecopac (U.K.) 
Limited and Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited, with goodwill on both acquisitions added to the Packaging 
Distribution CGU.

At 31 December 2020, the Group had two CGU Groupings to which goodwill had been ascribed namely:

(i)  Packaging Distribution, comprising goodwill arising on all acquisitions in this segment since 2001; and 
(ii)  Manufacturing Operations, comprising goodwill arising on Labels’ acquisitions, primarily in the Reseal-it business in 2000.

The recoverable amount of each CGU Grouping is determined using ’value in use’ calculations with key assumptions relating to 
discount rates, sales growth rates, projected gross margin and overhead costs. A post-tax discount rate of 9.0% (2019: 9.0%)  
is used for both CGU's reflecting the Group's weighted average cost of capital adjusted for appropriate market risk, which is 
considered to be the most definitive basis for arriving at a discount rate. The Group believes the risk profiles across the markets 
in which it operates are not significantly different and has therefore deemed it appropriate to apply the same discount rate to 
both CGUs. The pre-tax discount rate is 11.1% (2019: 11.1%) for each CGU Grouping and the Group’s effective tax rate is then 
applied to give the post-tax discount rate.

Sales growth rates of 1%, changes in gross margin and overhead costs are based on our expectation of future performance in the 
markets in which we operate. These are consistent with our budgets for 2021 and strategic plans for future years. The assumptions 
are used to extrapolate cash flows for five years after which a terminal value is calculated assuming no inherent growth.

The Directors believe the assumptions used are appropriate. In addition they have conducted a sensitivity analysis to determine 
the changes in assumptions that would result in an impairment of the carrying amount of goodwill. Based on this analysis the 
Directors believe that any reasonable changes in the key assumptions would maintain a value for each CGU Grouping that exceeds 
its carrying amount. Therefore at 31 December 2020 no impairment charge is required against the carrying amount of goodwill.

87

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

10. Goodwill and other intangible assets (continued)
Brand
values
£000

Other intangible assets

Customer
relationships
£000

2020
Total
£000

Fair value on acquisition
At 1 January 
Additions (note 23)

At 31 December

Amortisation
At 1 January 
Charge for year

At 31 December

Carrying value
At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2019

891
–

891

723
100

823

26,762
291

27,053

9,570
2,420

11,990

27,653
291

27,944

10,293
2,520

12,813

2019
Total
£000

24,340
3,313

27,653

7,902
2,391

10,293

68

15,063

15,131

168

17,192

17,360

Other intangible assets comprise separately identifiable intangible assets recognised on the acquisitions of businesses and 
subsidiary companies in Packaging Distribution between 2014 and 2020. They are recorded at fair value on acquisition less 
subsequent amortisation.

These are primarily Brand values, which are calculated on the Relief from Royalty method and a valuation of Customer 
relationships, which is calculated on the Excess Earnings method, based on the net anticipated earnings stream. Brand values are 
calculated on royalty rates of 0.5%, consistent with an assessment of what would be charged in a typical franchise agreement. 
The valuation of Customer relationships is calculated using our best estimates of customer attrition rates, and returns, based 
on assessments of performance levels in the markets in which we operate. Brand values and Customer relationship valuations 
are amortised on a straight-line basis over periods up to five years and over a ten year period respectively.

On 6 January 2020 the Group’s subsidiary, MGUK, acquired the trade and selected assets of the packaging business known  
as Armagrip. Values for Customer relationships were recognised and added to those shown above for Packaging Distribution.

At 31 December 2020, the Group retained values in respect of:

Year of 
acquisition

Company/business acquired

2014
2014
2015
2016
2016
2016
2017

2018
2018
2019
2019
2020

Packaging business of Lane Packaging Limited
Network Packaging Limited
Packaging business of One Packaging Limited
Packaging business of Colton Packaging Teesside
Packaging business of Edward McNeil Limited
Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited
Packaging business of Greenwoods Stock Boxes Limited and  
 Nottingham Recycling Limited
Tyler Packaging (Leicester) Limited
Harrisons Packaging Limited
Ecopac (U.K.) Limited
Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited
Packaging business of Armagrip

Brand

Customer
relationships

ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü
ü

ü
ü
ü
ü
ü

ü

ü
ü
ü

88   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

11. Property, plant and equipment

Plant,
 machinery
& vehicles
£000

Property
£000

Cost
At 1 January 2019
Acquisitions
Additions
Disposals

At 31 December 2019
Additions
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2019
Acquisitions
Charge for year
Disposals

At 31 December 2019
Charge for year
Exchange movements
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2019

At 1 January 2019

7,556
–
557
(84)

8,029
145
–
(60)

8,114

3,831
–
427
(77)

4,181
421
–
(60)

4,542

3,572

3,848

3,725

Total
£000

34,792
703
2,648
(1,239)

36,904
804
182
(2,977)

27,236
703
2,091
(1,155)

28,875
659
182
(2,917)

26,799

34,913

22,428
480
1,171
(977)

23,102
1,298
116
(2,785)

26,259
480
1,598
(1,054)

27,283
1,719
116
(2,845)

21,731

26,273

5,068

5,773

4,808

8,640

9,621

8,533

The main components of property, plant and equipment are:

(i) 

(ii) 

 Three properties owned in our Manufacturing Operations and tenant’s improvements at a number of short and medium-term 
leases in Packaging Distribution, categorised as Property.
 A significant investment in plant and machinery in Manufacturing Operations, typically printing presses for label printing 
and corrugated case-making machinery, as well as investments in our IT hardware systems throughout the Group, which 
are all categorised under the combined heading of Plant, machinery and vehicles.

Property at net book value comprises:
Freeholds
Long leaseholds
Short leaseholds

2020
£000

2019
£000

1,779
1,506
287

3,572

1,830
1,688
330

3,848

Contractual commitments for capital expenditure for which no provision has been made in the accounts amounted to £919,000 
(2019: £Nil).

89

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

12. Right of use assets 

Cost
On adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019
Additions
Acquisitions

At 31 December 2019
Additions
Exchange movements
Lease modifications
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Accumulated depreciation
At 1 January 2019
Charge for year

At 31 December 2019
Charge for year
Exchange movements
Lease modifications
Disposals

At 31 December 2020

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2020

Carrying amount
At 31 December 2019

Plant,
 machinery
& vehicles
£000

4,751
1,697
12

6,460
1,243
–
220
(470)

7,453

–
1,516

1,516
1,633
–
(70)
(470)

2,609

Property
£000

22,725
1,926
967

25,618
625
136
5,713
(38)

32,054

–
4,707

4,707
5,107
20
(1,482)
(38)

8,314

Total
£000

27,476
3,623
979

32,078
1,868
136
5,933
(508)

39,507

–
6,223

6,223
6,740
20
(1,552)
(508)

10,923

23,740

4,844

28,584

20,911

4,944

25,855

The property portfolio comprises a number of property leases for periods from one to ten years, which are subject to rent 
reviews. The Group also leases the majority of its commercial vehicles, motor vehicles and forklift trucks on leases, with the 
leases running for periods of up to seven years. 

90   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
13. Inventories

Raw materials and consumables
Work in progress
Finished goods and goods for resale

2020
£000

1,112
520
14,226

15,858

2019
£000

710
204
14,899

15,813

Inventories represent raw materials, work in progress and finished goods held at the year-end in our businesses to respond  
to customers’ requirements. These comprise large numbers of comparatively small balances.

Local teams review inventory levels, older and obsolete inventories and provide against exposures throughout the year.  
The Group’s executive management then reviews these local judgements to ensure they properly reflect movements in 
absolute inventory levels, ageing of holdings and known obsolescence.

Movement in the provisions for slow-moving and obsolete inventories

At 1 January
Acquisitions
Additional provisions recognised in the consolidated income statement
Inventories written off during the year

At 31 December

2020
£000

713
–
1,172
(596)

1,289

2019
£000

448
187
545
(467)

713

91

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

14. Trade and other receivables

Current
Trade receivables 
Loss allowance

Lease receivables
Other receivables
Prepayments

Non-current
Other receivables

2020
£000

2019
£000

47,171
(1,148)

46,023
–
2,656
2,692

51,371

47,005
(310)

46,695
246
2,571
2,532

52,044

35

35

Trade receivables represent amounts owed by customers in respect of revenues for goods or services provided prior to the 
year end. The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to trade receivables. The average credit period taken at the reporting 
date is 54 days (2019: 57 days). No interest is charged on overdue receivables.

The Group uses external credit scoring systems to assess new customers’ credit quality and set credit limits for each customer. 
The Group has a substantial customer base covering a wide range of business segments. No individual customer represents 
more than 5% of total trade receivables. Receivables balances greater than £25,000 are reviewed by the Board twice in each year.

Since the inception of IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’, the Group has applied a simplified approach to measuring the ECL level. This 
uses a provision matrix which takes into account historical credit loss experience based on the past-due status of receivables, 
adjusted to reflect current conditions and management’s estimates of future economic conditions and known recoverability 
issues as a means of measuring the loss allowance.

The Group writes off trade receivables when there is no realistic prospect of recovery with the amount written off against the 
loss allowance held. The credit risk profile of these receivables is presented based on their past due status and the calculated 
loss ratios applied to the profiled receivables to give the ECL.

Risk profile category (ageing)

2020
£000

ECL rate

2020 ECL
 allowance
£000

Current
Overdue
0-30 days
30-60 days
60-90 days
Over 90 days

35,569

 1.59%

7,107
3,658
659
178

47,171

 3.10%
 4.71%
13.90%
53.84%

2019
£000

ECL rate

34,751

 0.37%

6,381
4,534
1,061
278

 0.75%
 1.04%
 3.11%
18.67%

567

221
172
92
96

1,148

47,005

2019 ECL
allowance
£000

130

48
47
33
52

310

The ECL allowance reflects the Group’s prior experience and assessment of the current economic environment, with credit risk 
particularly heightened as a result of the Covid-19 pandemic. In determining the recoverability of trade receivables and the 
level of loss allowance, known changes in credit quality or expected credit loss from the date credit was originally granted are 
taken into account.

ECL allowance
At 1 January
Change in loss allowance for new trade receivables in 2020
Amounts written off as uncollectible (net of recoveries)

At 31 December

2020
£000

310
1,296
(458)

1,148

2019
£000

304
203
(197)

310

The Directors consider that the carrying amount of trade and other receivables approximate to their fair value.

92   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

15. Financial instruments
The Group funds its operations from a number of sources of finance, namely operating cash flows, bank borrowings, finance 
leases and shareholders’ equity, which comprises share capital, reserves and retained earnings. The objective is to achieve  
a capital structure with an appropriate cost of capital, whilst providing flexibility in immediate and medium-term funding to 
accommodate any material investment requirements.

The Group's principal financial instruments comprise borrowings, cash and short-term deposits, and other items, such as 
trade receivables and trade payables that arise directly from its operations. The main purpose of these financial instruments  
is to provide finance for the Group's operations. Throughout the period under review, the Group's policy is that no trading in 
financial instruments is undertaken for speculative purposes.

There has been no significant change to the Group’s exposure to market risks during 2020. Principal risks arising are liquidity 
risk and credit risk, with secondary risks being interest rate risk and currency risk. The Board reviews and agrees policies for 
managing each of these risks, which are summarised below and have remained unchanged since the beginning of 2021.

Liquidity risk
The Group’s liquidity requirements are met by ensuring adequate access to funds by maintaining appropriate levels of 
committed bank facilities, which are reviewed regularly. The Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC of  
£30 million was extended in the year and is available until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial 
rates and carries standard financial covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over certain trade 
receivables’ balances. The maturity profile is set out in this note.

Credit risk
The Group’s exposure to credit risk is managed by dealing only with banks and financial institutions with good credit ratings and  
by applying considerable rigour in managing trade receivables. The Group’s principal credit risk is primarily attributable to its 
trade receivables. Amounts presented in the balance sheet are shown net of an ECL allowance, as estimated by the Group’s 
management with details set out in note 14.

Interest rate risk
The Group borrows in the desired currencies at floating rates of interest. It was not considered necessary to cover interest  
rate exposures by the use of financial instruments during 2020.

A sensitivity analysis has been prepared based on bank interest rate exposures at the year-end date and the stipulated change 
taking place at the beginning of the financial year and held constant throughout the year. If interest rates had been 50 basis points 
higher and all other variables held constant, the Group’s profit before tax would have decreased by £48,000 (2019: £96,000).

Currency risk
The Group has three overseas subsidiaries, one operating in Ireland, one operating in The Netherlands and one operating in 
Sweden. Revenues and expenses are denominated exclusively in Euros and Swedish Krone respectively. As a result, movements 
in the Euro and Swedish Krone to sterling exchange rates could affect the Group’s sterling balance sheet. The Group’s policy 
during 2020 has been to review the need to hedge currency exposures on a regular basis and it was not considered necessary 
to cover existing currency exposures by the use of financial instruments. The Group continues to review the need to hedge 
exposures on a regular basis.

The Sterling value of foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities at the year-end is as follows:

Euros
Swedish Krone

Assets
2020
£000

6,368
1,745

8,113

Assets
2019
£000

4,955
633

5,588

Liabilities
2020
£000

Liabilities
2019
£000

5,273
1,294

6,567

4,277
253

4,530

The Sterling value of the Group’s foreign currency denominated profit/(loss) before tax is as follows:

Euros
Swedish Krone

2020
£000

482
504

986

2019
£000

(47)
472

425

93

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

15. Financial instruments (continued)
The following table details the sensitivity to a 5% reduction in Sterling against the respective foreign currencies. The sensitivity 
of the Group’s exposure to foreign currency risk is determined based on the exposure at the year-end and on the change taking 
place at the beginning of the financial year and held constant throughout the year.

Euros
Swedish Krone

Cash and cash equivalents

Currency
Sterling
Euros
US Dollars
Swedish Krone

Cash and cash equivalents

Bank borrowings
Currency – Sterling

Bank borrowings

Net bank debt

Result
2020
£000

24
25

49

Result
2019
£000

Other equity
2020
£000

Other equity
2019
£000

(2)
23

21

55
23

78

2020
£000

5,728
975
5
520

7,228

7,766

7,766

34
19

53

Restated*
2019
£000

5,054
370
54
101

5,579

18,253

18,253

538

12,674

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash at bank and other short-term highly liquid investments with maturity of three 
months or less.

The Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC (’Lloyds’) of £30 million is now available until December 2025. 
Under the facility, trade receivables of the Group’s largest trading subsidiary, Macfarlane Group UK Limited are assigned to 
Lloyds who then fund the Group in advance of the collection of these transferred receivables. The Invoice Discounting facility 
bears interest at normal commercial rates and carries standard financial covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of 
headroom over trade receivables’ balances. 

The Group has been in compliance with all conditions in relation to its borrowing facility throughout 2020 and has remained  
in compliance in 2021 to date.

Interest rates
Bank borrowings are held at floating rates of interest. The average effective interest rate on these borrowings approximates  
to 2.39% per annum (2019: 2.80%).

Fair value of financial instruments
Current assets and liabilities are all held at floating rates. The fair values of cash and cash equivalents and bank borrowings  
at 31 December 2020 all materially equate to book values.

Borrowing facilities
The Group’s committed borrowing facilities, for which all conditions precedent had been met, are as follows:

Drawn down
Undrawn

Committed borrowing facilities

94   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

2020
£000

7,766
22,234

30,000

2019
£000

18,253
11,747

30,000

The Group’s borrowing profile is as follows:

At amortised cost
Bank borrowings – secured
Lease liabilities

Current borrowings
Non-current – lease liabilities

Total borrowings

Equity

Gearing (net debt to equity) ratio

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

7,766
5,784

13,550
22,908

36,458

18,253
6,321

24,574
19,646

44,220

79,778

68,737

46%

64%

Financial instruments carried at fair value
IFRS 7 requires that all financial instruments carried at fair value be analysed under certain levels. The table below analyses 
financial instruments, into a fair value hierarchy based on the valuation technique used to determine fair value.

• 
• 

• 

 Level 1: quoted prices (unadjusted) in active markets for identical assets or liabilities.
 Level 2: inputs other than quoted prices included within Level 1 that are observable for the asset or liability, either directly 
(i.e., as prices) or indirectly (i.e., derived from prices).
 Level 3: inputs for the asset or liability that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs).

The fair values of all financial assets and financial liabilities by class together with their carrying amounts shown in the balance 
sheet are as follows:

Financial instruments which are designated  
 at fair value through profit or loss (note 16)

Contingent consideration

Carrying
amount
2020
£000

–

Carrying
amount
2019
£000

Fair value
2020
£000

–

Fair value
2019
£000

Contingent consideration

1,600

1,600

Level 1
2020
£000

–

Level 1
2019
£000

–

Level 2
2020
£000

–

Level 2
2019
£000

–

Level 3
2020
£000

–

Level 3
2019
£000

1,600

The following table shows the valuation techniques used for Level 3 fair values, and significant unobservable inputs used  
for Level 3 items. 

Financial instruments measured at fair value

Valuation technique

Significant unobservable inputs (Level 3 only)

Contingent consideration

The expected payment reflects calculated 
cash outflows under possible earn-out 
scenarios and is not discounted 

Trading performance of acquired 
subsidiary companies in a period  
of 12 months following acquisition

The following are the contractual maturities of financial liabilities, including estimated interest payments and excluding  
the effect of netting agreements.

Non-derivative financial instruments

Secured bank borrowings
Lease liabilities
Trade payables

2020 Contractual cash flows

Due within
one year 
£000

Due from
 1-5 years
£000

Due after
five years
£000

7,766
5,784
35,622

49,172

–
16,643
19

16,662

–
6,265
–

6,265

Total
£000

7,766
28,692
35,641

72,099

95

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

15. Financial instruments (continued)

Non-derivative financial instruments

Secured bank borrowings
Lease liabilities
Trade payables

16. Trade and other payables

Due within one year
Trade payables
Other taxation and social security
Contingent consideration
Other payables
Accruals and deferred income

Due after more than one year
Other payables

2019 Contractual cash flows (Restated*)

Total
£000

18,253
25,967
36,221

80,441

Due within
one year
£000

18,253
6,321
36,199

60,773

Due from
1-5 years
£000

–
16,035
22

16,057

Due after
five years
£000

–
3,611
–

3,611

2020
£000

2019
£000

35,622
4,009
–
1,147
6,977

47,755

36,199
3,662
1,600
515
6,554

48,530

19

22

Trade and other payables principally comprise amounts outstanding for trade purchases and ongoing costs in all the Group’s 
businesses. No interest is charged on overdue trade payables.

The Directors consider that the carrying amounts for trade and other payables approximate to their fair value.

17. Lease liabilities

Amounts payable under leases
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Present value of lease liabilities
Due for settlement within 12 months (current liabilities)

Due for settlement after more than 12 months (non-current liabilities)

At 1 January
On adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019
New leases entered into during year
Exchange movements
Acquisitions
Lease modifications
Repayments under leases

At 31 December

2020
£000

2019
£000

5,784
16,643
6,265

28,692
(5,784)

22,908

2020
£000

25,967
–
1,868
91
–
7,485
(6,719)

28,692

6,321
16,035
3,611

25,967
(6,321)

19,646

2019
£000

101
27,963
3,623
–
979
–
(6,699)

25,967

All lease payments due and payable during 2020 have been made and there are no payment concessions from any lessors to be 
carried forward into 2021. The Directors consider that the carrying amounts for lease liabilities approximate to their fair value.

96   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

18. Deferred tax

At 1 January 2019
Acquisition (note 23)
(Charged)/credited in income statement
Credited in other comprehensive income
 Deferred tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability

At 31 December 2019
Acquisition (note 23)
(Charged)/credited in income statement
Credited in other comprehensive income
 Deferred tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
 Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

At 31 December 2020

2020 deferred tax assets
 Due outwith one year
2020 deferred tax liabilities
 Due outwith one year

2019 deferred tax assets
 Due outwith one year
2019 deferred tax liabilities
 Due outwith one year

Restated*
Tax losses/
 accelerated
 capital
 allowances
£000

Other
 intangible
 assets
£000

Retirement
 benefit
 obligations
£000

Restated*
Total
£000

87
(37)
(90)

–

(40)
–
(39)

–
–

(2,794)
(562)
405

–

(2,951)
(55)
130

–
–

(79)

(2,876)

117

(196)

(79)

125

(165)

(40)

–

(2,876)

(2,876)

–

(2,951)

(2,951)

1,660
–
(469)

(92)

1,099
–
(548)

(401)
129

279

279

–

279

1,099

–

1,099

(1,047)
(599)
(154)

(92)

(1,892)
(55)
(457)

(401)
129

(2,676)

396

(3,072)

(2,676)

1,224

(3,116)

(1,892)

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

Deferred tax balances represent tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts of 
assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit and  
is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities at 31 December 2020 have been 
calculated based on a corporation tax rate of 19%.

19. Share capital

Allotted, issued and fully paid:
At 1 January
Issued during the year

At 31 December

Number of 
25p shares

2020
£000

2019
£000

157,812,000
–

157,812,000

39,453
–

39,453

39,387
66

39,453

The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which carry no right to fixed income.

Each ordinary share carries one vote in any General Meeting of the Company.

On 5 September 2019, the Company issued 264,382 ordinary shares of 25p each at a value of 94.56p per share as non-cash 
consideration to the Vendors of Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited, an effective value of £250,000. The shares were 
admitted to the Official List of the London Stock Exchange on 5 September 2019.

97

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

20. Reserves

Share
premium
£000

Revaluation
reserve
£000

Translation
reserve
£000

Balance at 1 January 2019 (as previously stated)
Restatement (see pages 76 and 77)

Balance at 1 January 2019 (as restated)
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (see note 7)
Foreign currency translation differences – foreign operations
Issue of new shares (net of expenses of issue)
Share-based payments
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability taken direct to equity
Deferred tax taken direct to equity

Balance at 31 December 2019
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (see note 7)
Foreign currency translation differences – foreign operations
Share-based payments
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability taken direct to equity
Deferred tax taken direct to equity

Balance at 31 December 2020

* Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.

12,975
–

12,975
–
–
–
173
–
–
–

13,148
–
–
–
–
–
–

13,148

70
–

70
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

70
–
–
–
–
–
–

70

293
–

293
–
–
(62)
–
–
–
–

231
–
–
60
–
–
–

291

Restated*
Retained
earnings
£000

9,807
(403)

9,404
9,600
(3,689)
–
–
75
537
(92)

15,835
10,171
(1,105)
–
75
2,112
(272)

26,816

Exchange differences arising in the consolidated accounts on the retranslation at closing rates of the Group's net investments 
in foreign subsidiary companies are recorded as movements on the translation reserve.

21. Provisions

Cost
At 1 January 2020 (as previously stated)
Restatement (see pages 76 and 77)

At 1 January 2020 (as restated)
Reclassifications from Trade and other payables
Additions in the year
Payments

At 31 December 2020

Due within one year
Due after more than one year

At 31 December 2020

Property
£000

Restated*
Other
£000

Restated*
Total
£000

–
–

–
467
1,225
(125)

1,567

975
592

1,567

–
660

660
–
199
–

859

859
–

859

–
660

660
467
1,424
(125)

2,426

1,834
592

2,426

Property provisions relate to sums due in respect of dilapidations. 

Other provisions relate to sums due to customers in respect of backdated duty including interest.

98   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

22. Analysis of changes in net debt 

At 1 January 2020 (as previously stated)
Restatement (page 77)

At 1 January 2020 (as restated)
Non-cash movements
 New leases
 Exchange movements
 Lease modifications
 Cash movements

At 31 December 2020

Net bank debt 2020

Net bank debt 2019 Restated*

Cash
and cash
 equivalents
£000

3,310
2,269

5,579

–
–
–
1,649

7,228

Bank
borrowing
£000

(15,984)
(2,269)

(18,253)

–
–
–
10,487

Lease
liabilities
£000

(25,967)
–

(25,967)

(1,868)
(91)
(7,485)
6,719

Total
debt
£000

(38,641)
–

(38,641)

(1,868)
(91)
(7,485)
18,855

(7,766)

(28,692)

(29,230)

Cash
and cash
 equivalents
£000

Bank
borrowing
£000

Net bank
debt
£000

7,228

5,579

(7,766)

(538)

(18,253)

(12,674)

Cash and cash equivalents (presented as a single class of asset on the face of the balance sheet) comprise cash at bank and other 
short-term highly liquid investments with maturity of three months or less.

The movement in net bank debt is inclusive of the net cash outflow in respect of acquisitions set out in note 23. 

99

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

23. Acquisitions
On 6 January 2020, the Group’s subsidiary, MGUK acquired the business trade and assets of Armagrip, a packaging distributor 
based in Co. Durham, for a consideration of approximately £0.9 million, paid in cash on acquisition. The business achieved sales 
of £1.2 million and a profit of £0.1 million in 2020.

In 2019, MGUK acquired 100% of Carnweather Limited, the parent company of Ecopac, for a maximum consideration of  
£3.9 million. £3.1 million was paid in cash on acquisition, with the deferred consideration of £0.8 million paid in 2020, as trading 
targets following acquisition were met in full.

In 2019 the Group also acquired 100% of Leyland, for a maximum consideration of £3.25 million. £2.00 million was paid in  
cash on acquisition with shares to the value of £0.25 million issued to the Vendors on acquisition. Deferred consideration  
of £0.97 million was paid in 2020, reflecting the results in the trading period after acquisition.

All the businesses detailed above are part of the Packaging Distribution segment. Goodwill arising on the acquisitions is 
attributable to the anticipated future profitability of the distribution of Group product ranges and anticipated operating 
synergies from future combinations of activities in the Packaging Distribution network.

Fair values assigned to net assets acquired and consideration paid and payable are set out below:

291
–
206
282
–
–
–
–
–
(55)

724
164

888

–
–
–

888

Previous
years’
acquisitions
£000

Armagrip
£000

2020
Total
£000

291
–
206
282
–
–
–
–
–
(55)

724
164

888

–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

–
–

–

–
1,773
–

1,773

–
1,773
–

2,661

(888)
–

(888)

(1,773)
–

(1,773)

(2,661)
–

(2,661)

2019
Total
£000

3,313
1,194
879
1,797
249
(149)
(1,658)
(235)
(979)
(599)

3,812
3,093

6,905

(1,600)
1,207
(250)

6,262

(6,262)
100

(6,162)

Net assets acquired
Other intangible assets (note 10)
Tangible assets (inc. ROU assets)
Inventories
Trade and other receivables
Cash and bank balances
Bank borrowings
Trade and other payables 
Current tax liabilities
Lease liabilities 
Deferred tax liabilities (note 18)

Net assets acquired
Goodwill arising on acquisition (note 10)

Total consideration
Contingent consideration on acquisitions
 Current year
 Prior years
Shares issued for non-cash consideration

Total cash consideration

Net cash outflow arising on acquisitions
Cash consideration
Cash and bank balances acquired

Net cash outflow – acquisitions

100   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

24. Retirement benefit obligations
Introduction
Macfarlane Group PLC sponsors a defined benefit pension scheme for certain active and former UK employees – the Macfarlane 
Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) (’the Scheme’). Two of the trading subsidiaries, Macfarlane Group UK Limited 
and Macfarlane Labels Limited are also sponsoring employers of the Scheme. The Scheme is currently in deficit and disclosure 
of the respective proportions of the Group deficit are included and disclosed in the financial statements of each of the three 
participating employers.

The Scheme is an HMRC registered pension scheme, administered by a Board of Trustees composed of employer-nominated 
representatives and member-nominated Trustees which is legally separate from the Group. The Scheme’s investments are 
held separately from those of the Group in managed funds under the supervision of the Trustees. The Trustees are required 
by law to act in the interest of all classes of beneficiary in the Scheme and are responsible for investment policy and the 
administration of benefits. 

The Scheme provides qualifying employees with an annual pension of 1/60 of pensionable salary for each completed year’s 
service on attainment of a normal retirement age of 65. Pensionable salaries were frozen for the remaining active members at 
the levels current at 30 April 2009 with the change taking effect from 30 April 2010. As a result no further salary inflation applies 
for active members who elected to remain in the Scheme. Active members’ benefits also include life assurance cover, with the 
payment of these benefits at the discretion of the Trustees of the Scheme. The Scheme was closed to new entrants during 2002.

On leaving active service a deferred member’s pension is revalued from the time of withdrawal until the pension is drawn. 
Revaluation in deferment is statutory and since 2010 has been revalued on the Consumer Price Index (’CPI’) measure of 
inflation. Revaluation of pensions in payment is a blend of fixed increases and inflationary increases depending on the relevant 
periods of accrual of benefit. For pensions in payment, the inflationary increase is currently based on the Retail Price Index 
(’RPI’) measure of inflation or based on Limited Price Indexation (’LPI’) for certain defined periods of service.

During 2012, Macfarlane Group PLC agreed with the Board of Trustees to amend benefits for pensioner, deferred and active 
members in the Scheme by offering a Pension Increase Exchange (’PIE’) option to pensioner members and a PIE option to all 
other members at retirement after 1 May 2012.

Balance sheet disclosures at 31 December 2020
The Scheme’s qualified actuary from Aon carries out triennial valuations using the Projected Unit Credit Method to determine 
the level of deficit. For the most recent triennial valuation at 1 May 2020, the results of this valuation showed that the market 
value of the relevant investments of the Scheme was £94,100,000 and represented 91% of the actuarial value of benefits that 
had accrued to members.

The investment classes held by the Scheme and the Scheme deficit, based on the results of the actuarial valuation as at 1 May 
2020, updated to the year-end are as shown below:

Investment class

Equities
UK equity funds
Overseas equity funds
Multi-asset diversified growth funds

Bonds
Liability-driven investment funds

Other
European loan fund
Secured property income fund
Cash
Fair value of scheme investments

Valuation
2020
£000

Asset
allocation

Valuation
2019
£000

Asset
 allocation

8,351
14,585
31,559

8.4%
14.7%
31.7%

8,913
13,226
25,382

10.1%
15.0%
28.8%

Valuation
2018
£000

6,244
9,781
17,512

Asset
allocation

8.2%
12.9%
23.1%

31,463

31.7%

27,688

31.5%

28,379

37.4%

6,493
6,254
725

6.5%
6.3%
0.7%

6,379
6,192
281

7.3%
7.0%
0.3%

6,645
7,112
154

8.8%
9.4%
0.2%

99,430

100.0%

88,061

100.0%

75,827

100.0%

Present value of scheme liabilities

(100,901)

Pension scheme deficit

(1,471)

(94,526)

(6,465)

(85,592)

(9,765)

101

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

24. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)
The Trustees review the Scheme’s investments on a regular basis and consult with the Company regarding any proposed changes 
to the investment profile. During 2020 the Trustees agreed to make adjustments between the various investment categories 
to bring the overall allocations into line with the strategic asset allocation in the Trustees’ Statement of Investment Principles.

Liability-Driven Investment Funds provide a match of 100% against the impact of inflation movements on pension liabilities 
and of approximately 85% against the impact of movements in interest rates on pension liabilities.

The ability to realise the Scheme’s investments at, or close to, fair value was considered when setting the investment strategy. 
87% (2019: 86%) of the Scheme’s investments can be realised at fair value on a daily or weekly basis. The remaining investments 
have monthly or quarterly liquidity, however, whilst the income from these helps to meet the Scheme’s cash flow needs, they 
are not expected to be realised at short notice. The present value of the Scheme liabilities is derived from cash flow projections 
over a long period and is thus inherently uncertain.

Assumptions
The Scheme’s liabilities at 31 December 2020 were calculated on the following bases as required under IAS19:

Discount rate
Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment

Spouse’s pension assumption
Pensioner/active and deferred members
PIE take up rate
Inflation assumption (RPI)
Inflation assumption (CPI)
Life expectancy beyond normal retirement age of 65
Scheme members aged 55
 Male
 Female
Scheme members aged 65
 Male
 Female
Average uplift for GMP service

2020

2019

2018

1.35%
0.00%
3% or 5%
for fixed increases 
or 2.95% for LPI.
2.15% post 
5 April 2006

2.00%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases 
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

2.80%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases  
or 3.20% for LPI. 
2.25% post  
5 April 2006

75%/75%
65%
3.00%
2.50%

22.6 years
24.3 years

22.2 years
23.5 years
0.40%

70%/80%
45%
3.00%
2.10%

23.5 years
22.6 years

22.0 years
24.0 years
0.40%

70%/80%
45%
3.30%
2.30%

0.40%

Sensitivity to significant assumptions
The Pension scheme exposes the Group to actuarial risks, such as interest rate risk, inflation risk, longevity risk and investment 
risk. The significant assumptions used for IAS 19 are discount rate, inflation and mortality. If different assumptions were used, 
then this could have a material effect on the deficit. Assuming all other assumptions are held static then a movement in the 
following key assumptions would affect the level of the Pension scheme deficit as shown below:

Assumptions
Discount rate movement of +0.6%
Inflation rate movement of +0.1%
Mortality movement of +0.1 year in age rating

2020
£000

9,684
(515)
303

2019
£000

9,072
(482)
284

2018
£000

8,214
(436)
257

Positive figures reflect a reduction in scheme liabilities and therefore a reduction in the deficit. The sensitivity information has 
been prepared using the same method as adopted when updating the results of the most recent actuarial valuation to the 
balance sheet date and is consistent with the approach adopted in previous years.

The level of sensitivities shown reflect average movements in the assumptions in the last three years.

The sensitivity information assumes that the average duration of the scheme’s liabilities is seventeen years.

102   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

GMP equalisation
In 2018, the Directors made the judgement that the estimated effect of GMP equalisation on the Group’s pension liabilities 
was a past service cost. The average uplift for GMP service for impacted members was reflected through the consolidated 
income statement in 2018, with any subsequent changes in the estimate to be recognised in other comprehensive income. 
This treatment was based on the fact that reported pension liabilities for the scheme as at 31 December 2017 did not include 
any amount in respect of GMP equalisation.

UK pension legislation requires that pension schemes are funded prudently. Following the conclusion of the 2020 actuarial 
valuation, the scheme’s trustees agreed with the Company to a deficit recovery period of 4 years. As part of this agreement, 
the Group reconfirmed its effective unconditional right to a refund of any surplus, based on and in accordance with the terms 
and conditions of the defined benefit scheme and minimum funding requirements. Accordingly IFRIC 14 does not require an 
adjustment to the net pension liability.

Macfarlane Group PLC paid contributions of £3,211,000 per annum (inclusive of current service costs and interest of £329,000), 
which along with investment returns from return-seeking assets is expected to make good the actuarial shortfall by April 2024. The 
estimated deficit reduction contributions in 2021 will be £1,800,000 (inclusive of estimated service costs and interest of £160,000).

The employer contribution rate for active members from 1 May 2020 is 44.4% (previously 28.7%) of pensionable salary and the 
employee contribution rate is 7.0% of pensionable salary.

Movement in the scheme deficit during the year

At 1 January
Current service costs
Contributions from sponsoring employers
GMP on transfer values
Net finance cost (note 4)
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability in the year

At 31 December

Analysis of amounts charged to profit before tax
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values
Net finance cost

Pension expense charged to profit before tax

Analysis of the remeasurement of the pension scheme liability recognised  
 in the statement of other comprehensive income
Return on scheme investments excluding amount shown in interest income
Changes due to scheme experience
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of scheme liabilities

Remeasurement of the pension scheme liability recognised in the statement  
 of other comprehensive income

Movement in the fair value of scheme investments
At 1 January
Interest income
Return on scheme investments (excluding amount shown in interest income)
Contributions from sponsoring employers
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid

At 31 December

2020
£000

(6,465)
(143)
3,211
(87)
(99)
2,112

(1,471)

(143)
(87)
(99)

(329)

2019
£000

(9,765)
(112)
3,106
–
(231)
537

(6,465)

(112)
–
(231)

(343)

10,655
2,364
(10,907)

11,154
(102)
(10,515)

2,112

537

88,061
1,751
10,655
3,211
34
(4,282)

99,430

75,827
2,109
11,154
3,106
70
(4,205)

88,061

103

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

24. Retirement benefit obligations (continued)

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities

At 1 January
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Changes due to scheme experience
Changes in assumptions underlying the scheme liabilities
Benefits paid

At 31 December

2020
£000

2019
£000

(94,526)
(143)
(87)
(1,850)
(34)
2,364
(10,907)
4,282

(100,901)

(85,592)
(112)
–
(2,340)
(70)
(102)
(10,515)
4,205

(94,526)

The cumulative amount of actuarial losses recognised in other comprehensive income since the date of transition to IAS 19 on 
1 January 2004 is £19,254,000 (2019: £21,366,000).

The history of experience adjustments and actual returns on scheme assets and scheme liabilities is as follows:

2020
£000

2019
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

2016
£000

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of scheme investments

Pension scheme deficit

(100,901)
99,430

(1,471)

(94,526)
88,061

(6,465)

(85,592)
75,827

(9,765)

(92,783)
80,960

(11,823)

(92,345)
77,808

(14,537)

Actual return on scheme investments
Amount

Percentage of scheme investments

Experience adjustment on scheme liabilities
Amount

Percentage of scheme liabilities

Experience adjustment on scheme investments
Amount

Percentage of scheme investments

12,406

12.5%

13,263

15.1%

(8,543)

(8.5%)

(10,617)

(11.2%)

10,655

10.7%

11,154

12.7%

(2,156)

(2.8%)

4,111

4.8%

(4,143)

(5.5%)

5,795

7.2%

12,080

15.5%

(3,953)

(4.3%)

(15,162)

(16.4%)

3,730

4.6%

9,610

12.4%

Defined contribution schemes
The Group also operates a number of defined contribution pension arrangements, set up as the Macfarlane Group Personal 
Pension Plan, including an Auto-enrolment scheme. The assets of these plans are held separately from those of the Group in 
independently administered funds. The pension cost charge represents contributions paid by the Group to these plans and 
amounted to £1,670,000 (2019: £1,579,000). Contributions amounting to £168,000 (2019: £181,000) were payable to the plans 
and are included in trade and other payables at 31 December.

104   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

25. Share-based payments

Equity-settled long-term incentive plans 
Movements in PSP awards during the year

Outstanding at 1 January
Awarded during the year
Lapsed during the year

Outstanding at 31 December

Number of
 shares
2020

Number of
 shares
2019

604,270
716,397
(53,356)

1,267,311

–
604,270
–

604,270

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in September 2020 based  
on 100% of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2022 to be between 6.53p and 7.84p for between 25%-100%  
of this part of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

A nil cost option award was granted under The Macfarlane Group PLC Long Term Incentive Plan in May 2019 based on 100%  
of salary. The performance condition requires EPS in 2021 to be between 6.77p and 8.12p for between 25%-100% of this part 
of the award to vest, working on a straight-line basis.

Both awards are subject to an underpin based on the Remuneration Committee’s view of overall performance in the three-year 
periods to 31 December 2021 and 2022 respectively. No re-setting of either award is allowed. Vesting periods are three years 
and awards vesting then have a holding period of two years after vesting.

The Group recognised an expense of £75,000 (2019: £75,000) in 2020 relating to equity-settled long-term incentive plan 
awards on the basis that the 2019 awards had an estimated probability of vesting of 30% (2019: 65%) and the 2020 awards  
had an estimated probability of vesting of 75%.

26. Post balance sheet event
There are no post balance sheet events to be disclosed.

27. Related party transactions
The Group has related party relationships with 

its subsidiaries, listed on page 120, 
its Directors who comprise the Group Board; and 

(i) 
(ii) 
(iii)  the Macfarlane Group PLC sponsored pension schemes (see note 24).

Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries are eliminated on consolidation and are not disclosed.

Key management personnel comprise the Group Board. Their remuneration is set out below in aggregate for each of the 
categories specified in IAS 24 ’Related Party Disclosures’.

Directors’ remuneration
Employer’s national insurance contributions

2020
£000

898
124

2019
£000

953
130

1,022

1,083

Further details of Directors’ individual and collective remuneration are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on page 
43. The details provided in the Directors’ Remuneration Report address the Companies Act disclosure requirements relating 
to Directors’ remuneration.

Details of Directors’ shareholdings in the Company are shown on page 45 and total dividends of £14,000 were paid in respect 
of these shareholdings in 2020 (2019: £46,000).

Disclosures in relation to the pension schemes are set out in note 24.
The Directors have considered the implications of IAS 24 ’Related Party Disclosures’ and are satisfied that there are no other 
related party transactions occurring during the year, which require disclosure other than those already disclosed in these 
financial statements.

105

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Company balance sheet
At 31 December 2020

Non-current assets
Tangible assets
Right-of-use assets
Investments
Deferred tax assets
Debtors

Current assets
Debtors
Cash at bank and in hand

Total current assets

Creditors – amounts falling due within one year

Net current assets

Total assets less current liabilities

Creditors – amounts falling due after more than one year

Net assets excluding pension liability
Pension liability

Net assets

Capital and reserves
Share capital
Share premium
Profit and loss account

Shareholders’ funds

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this Company balance sheet.

The financial statements of Macfarlane Group PLC, Company registration number SC004221,  
were approved by the Board of Directors on 25 February 2021 and signed on its behalf by

Peter D. Atkinson 
Chief Executive 

Ivor Gray
Finance Director

Note

2020 
£000

2019
£000

29
30
31
32
33

33

34

35

40

36
37
37

38

54
119
26,935
111
33,545

60,764

3,858
2,731

6,589

(643)

5,946

61
134
29,989
439
31,162

61,785

3,135
2,615

5,750

(1,332)

4,418

66,710

66,203

(114)

66,596
(589)

66,007

39,453
13,148
13,406

66,007

(128)

66,075
(2,586)

63,489

39,453
13,148
10,888

63,489

106   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
 
 
 
Company statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2020

Note

Share
capital
£000

Share
premium
£000

Retained
earnings
£000

Total
£000

At 1 January 2019

39,387

12,975

8,267

60,629

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments
Issue of share capital

Total transactions with shareholders

40
32

7
25
36,37

–
–
–

–

–
–
66

66

–
–
–

–

–
–
173

173

5,373
1,038
(176)

6,235

(3,689)
75
–

(3,614)

5,373
1,038
(176)

6,235

(3,689)
75
239

(3,375)

At 31 December 2019

39,453

13,148

10,888

63,489

Comprehensive income
Profit for the year
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Tax on remeasurement of pension scheme liability
Corporation tax rate change on deferred tax

Total comprehensive income

Transactions with shareholders
Dividends
Share-based payments

Total transactions with shareholders

40
32
32

7
25

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

–
–
–
–

–

–
–

–

2,122
1,698
(323)
51

3,548

2,122
1,698
(323)
51

3,548

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

(1,105)
75

(1,030)

At 31 December 2020

39,453

13,148

13,406

66,007

The accompanying notes are an integral part of this statement of changes in equity.

107

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements
For the year ended 31 December 2020

28. Significant accounting policies
Macfarlane Group PLC is a public company listed on the London Stock Exchange, incorporated and domiciled in the United 
Kingdom and registered in Scotland.
These financial statements were prepared in accordance with Financial Reporting Standard 101 Reduced Disclosure Framework 
(’FRS 101’).

In preparing these financial statements, the Company applies the recognition, measurement and disclosure requirements  
of International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union (’Adopted IFRSs’) but makes amendments 
where necessary in order to comply with the Companies Act 2006 and has set out below where advantage of the FRS 101 
disclosure exemptions has been taken. In these financial statements, the Company has applied the exemptions available 
under FRS 101 in respect of the following disclosures: 

(i)  Cash flow statement and related notes;
(ii)  Comparative period reconciliations for share capital and tangible assets;
(iii)  Disclosures in respect of transactions with wholly owned subsidiaries; 
(iv)  The effects of new but not yet effective IFRSs;
(v)  Disclosures in respect of the compensation of Key Management Personnel; and 
(vi)  Disclosures in respect of capital management.

As the consolidated financial statements for Macfarlane Group PLC include the equivalent disclosures, the Company has also 
applied the exemptions available under FRS 101 in respect of certain disclosures required by;

IFRS 2 Share Based Payments in relation to Group-settled share-based payments;
IFRS 3 Business Combinations relating to business combinations undertaken by the Company; and

(i) 
(ii) 
(iii)  IFRS 7 Financial Instruments.

Going concern
The Directors, in their consideration of going concern, have reviewed the Company and Group’s future cash flow forecasts  
and revenue projections, which they believe are based on a prudent assessment of the market and past experience as set out  
on page 27. 

After making enquiries, the Directors have a reasonable expectation that the Company has adequate resources to continue  
in operational existence for at least the next twelve months. For this reason they continue to adopt the going concern basis  
in preparing the financial statements.

Critical judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty
The preparation of financial statements requires management to make estimates and assumptions that affect the amounts 
reported for assets and liabilities as at the balance sheet date and the amounts reported for revenues and expenses during  
the year. Due to the nature of estimation, the actual outcomes may well differ from these estimates. 

Critical judgements
No significant critical judgements have been made in the current or prior year.

Key sources of estimation uncertainty
The key sources of estimation uncertainty that have a significant effect on the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities  
are discussed below:

Retirement benefit obligations 
The determination of any defined benefit pension scheme liability is based on assumptions determined with independent 
actuarial advice. The key assumptions used include discount rate, inflation rate and mortality assumptions, for which a 
sensitivity analysis for the Group deficit is provided in note 24. The Directors consider that these sensitivities represent 
reasonable sensitivities which could occur in the next financial year.

Changes in accounting policies and application of revised standards and interpretations
There are no new accounting policies applied in 2020 which have had a material effect on these accounts.

The Directors do not consider that the adoption of new and revised standards and interpretations issued by the IASB  
in 2020 has had any material impact on the financial statements of the Group.

108   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Accounting policies
The financial statements are prepared on the historical cost basis except that certain of the following assets and liabilities  
are stated at their fair value. The following accounting policies have been applied consistently in dealing with items which  
are considered material in relation to the preparation of these financial statements.

Tangible assets
Property, plant and equipment are stated at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. 
Depreciation is calculated on a straight-line basis to write off the cost or valuation of the assets to their estimated residual 
values over the period of their expected useful lives. The rates of depreciation vary between 2%-5% per annum on property 
and 7%-25% per annum on plant and equipment. Rates of depreciation are reviewed annually to ensure they remain relevant 
and residual values are reviewed once in each calendar year.

Investments
Investments held as fixed assets are stated in note 31 at cost less any provision for impairment.

Non-derivative financial instruments
Non-derivative financial instruments comprise investments in equity and debt securities, trade and other debtors, cash and 
cash equivalents, loans and borrowings, and trade and other creditors.

Trade and other debtors
Trade and other debtors are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method, less any impairment losses.

Trade and other creditors
Trade and other creditors are recognised initially at fair value. Subsequent to initial recognition they are measured at amortised 
cost using the effective interest method.

Interest-bearing borrowings
Interest-bearing borrowings are recognised initially at fair value less attributable transaction costs. Subsequent to initial 
recognition, interest-bearing borrowings are stated at amortised cost using the effective interest method.

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’
The Company recognises a right-of-use asset and a corresponding lease liability for all lease arrangements in which it is the 
lessee, except for short-term leases (defined as leases with a lease term of 12 months or less) and leases of low value assets 
below £4,000. For these short-term or low value leases, the Company recognises the lease payments as an operating expense 
on a straight-line basis over the term of the lease.

For all other leases, the lease liability is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the 
commencement date, discounted by using the rate implicit in the lease. If this rate cannot be readily determined, the Company 
uses its incremental borrowing rate.

Lease liabilities are presented on two separate lines in the balance sheet for amounts due within one year and amounts due 
beyond one year. The lease liability is subsequently measured by increasing the carrying amount to reflect interest on the lease 
liability (using the effective interest method) and by reducing the liability by payments made. The Company remeasures the 
lease liability (and adjusts the related right-of-use asset) whenever the lease term has changed or a lease contract is modified 
and the lease modification is not accounted for as a separate lease. The Company did not make any such adjustments during 
the period presented.

Right-of-use assets comprise the initial measurement of the corresponding lease liability and are subsequently measured at 
cost less accumulated depreciation and impairment losses. Right-of-use assets are depreciated over the shorter period of lease 
term and useful life of the underlying asset. If a lease transfers ownership of the underlying asset or the cost of the right-of-use 
asset reflects that the Company expects to exercise a purchase option, the related right-of-use asset is depreciated over the 
useful life of the underlying asset. Depreciation starts at the commencement date of the lease. 

As a practical expedient, IFRS 16 permits a lessee not to separate non-lease components, and instead account for any lease 
and associated non-lease components as a single arrangement. The Company has not used this practical expedient and has 
separated out the non-lease components for its leases. These non-lease components, typically servicing and maintenance 
costs, have been recognised as an expense on a straight-line basis and disclosed in the profit and loss account.

The Company’s incremental borrowing rate applied to lease liabilities in 2020 is 3.0%.

Movements in lease liabilities during 2020 are set out in note 35.

109

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

28. Significant accounting policies (continued)
Revenue recognition
Revenue is measured at the fair value of the consideration received or receivable and represents amounts receivable for 
management services provided to Group undertakings, net of VAT. Revenue is recognised over time as the related charges  
are made. 

Financial instruments
Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised in the Company’s balance sheet when the Company becomes a party  
to the contractual provisions of the instrument.

Financial assets
Financial assets, categorised as investments, are recognised and derecognised on the effective date where the purchase or 
sale of an investment is under a contract whose terms require the delivery of the investment within the timeframe established. 
They are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs except for those financial assets classified at fair value through 
the income statement, which are initially measured at fair value.

Other financial assets comprise trade and other debtors that have fixed or determinable recoveries and are classified as trade 
and other debtors. The classification takes account of the nature and purpose of the financial assets and is determined on 
initial recognition. These are measured at amortised cost less impairment.

Indicators are assessed for the impairment of financial assets at each balance sheet date. Financial assets are impaired when 
there is objective evidence that as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the financial 
asset, the estimated future cash flows have been impacted. For trade and other debtors the amount of the impairment is the 
difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows.

The carrying amount of the financial asset is reduced by the impairment loss.

Cash and cash equivalents comprise cash on hand and on demand deposits, readily convertible to a known amount of cash 
and are subject to insignificant risk of changes in value.

Financial liabilities and equity instruments are classified as either financial liabilities or as equity in accordance with the 
substance of the contractual arrangements.

Financial liabilities comprise solely other financial liabilities under the terms of IFRS 7. Financial liabilities, including borrowings, 
are initially measured at fair value, net of transaction costs. Other financial liabilities are subsequently measured at amortised 
cost, with interest expense measured on an effective yield basis.

Equity instruments are any contracts evidencing a residual interest in the assets of the Company after deducting all of  
its liabilities. Equity instruments issued by the Company are recorded at the proceeds received, net of direct issue costs.

Derivative financial instruments were not used in the current or preceding financial year.

Contingent consideration classified as a liability will be subsequently re-measured through the income statement under  
the requirements of the revised IFRS 3.

Taxation
The tax expense represents the sum of the current tax payable and deferred tax.

Current tax is payable based on the taxable profit for the year. Taxable profit differs from profit before tax as reported in the 
profit and loss account because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it 
further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The current tax liability is calculated using tax rates that have been 
enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax balances represent the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on differences between the carrying amounts  
of assets and liabilities in the financial statements and the corresponding tax bases used in the computation of taxable profit 
and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not discounted.

The carrying value of deferred tax assets is reviewed at each balance sheet date and reduced to the extent that it is no longer 
probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences.

110   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is 
realised based on tax laws and rates that have been substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged 
or credited in the profit and loss account, except when it relates to items charged or credited in other comprehensive income, 
in which case the deferred tax is also recorded in the statement of other comprehensive income.

Retirement benefit costs
Defined contribution schemes
A defined contribution plan is a post-employment benefit plan under which the Company pays fixed contributions into a 
separate entity and will have no legal or constructive obligation to pay further amounts. Obligations for contributions to 
defined contribution pension plans are recognised as an expense in the profit and loss account in the periods during which 
services are rendered by employees.

Defined benefit schemes
A defined benefit plan is a post-employment benefit plan other than a defined contribution plan. The Group’s net retirement 
benefit obligation in respect of its defined benefit pension plan is calculated by estimating the amount of future benefits that 
employees have earned in return for their service in current and prior periods. These benefits are then discounted to determine 
the present value, and the fair values of any plan investments, at bid price, are deducted. The Group determines the net interest 
on the net retirement benefit obligation for the year by applying the discount rate used to measure the defined benefit 
obligation at the beginning of the year.

The discount rate is the yield at the reporting date on bonds that have a credit rating of at least AA that have maturity dates 
approximating to the average duration of the Group’s retirement benefit obligations and that are denominated in the currency 
in which the benefits are expected to be paid.

Remeasurements arising from defined benefit plans comprise actuarial gains and losses, returns on plan assets (excluding 
interest) and the effect of the asset ceiling (if any, excluding interest). Remeasurements are recognised in the statement of 
other comprehensive income and all other expenses related to defined benefit plans charged in staff costs in the profit and 
loss account.

When the benefits of a plan are changed, or when a plan is curtailed, the portion of the changed benefit related to past service 
by employees, or the gain or loss on curtailment, is recognised immediately in the profit and loss account when the plan 
amendment or curtailment occurs.

The calculation of the retirement benefit obligations is performed by a qualified actuary using the projected unit credit method. 
When the calculation results in a benefit to the Group, the recognised asset is limited to the present value of benefits available 
in the form of any future refunds from the plan or reductions in future contributions and takes into account the adverse effect 
of the present value of any minimum funding requirements.

The net defined benefit cost of the plan is apportioned to participating entities on the basis of the employment history of 
scheme members, who are allocated to the relevant subsidiary company, with any remaining unallocated members allocated  
to the parent company.

Share-based payments
The fair value of share-based payments awards granted to employees is recognised as an employee expense, with a 
corresponding increase in equity, over the period in which the employees become unconditionally entitled to the awards. The fair 
value of the awards granted is measured using an option valuation model, taking into account the terms and conditions upon 
which the awards were granted. The amount recognised as an expense is adjusted to reflect the actual number of awards for 
which the related service and non-market vesting conditions are expected to be met, such that the amount ultimately recognised 
as an expense is based on the number of awards that do meet the related service and non-market performance conditions at the 
vesting date. For share-based payment awards with non-vesting conditions, the grant date fair value of the share-based payment 
is measured to reflect such conditions and there is no true-up for differences between expected and actual outcomes. Details 
of the determination of the fair value of equity-settled share-based transactions are set out in note 25.

111

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

29. Tangible assets

Cost
At 1 January 2020 and 31 December 2020

Depreciation
At 1 January 2020
Charge for the year

At 31 December 2020

Net book value
At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2019

30. Right of use assets

Property

Cost
At 1 January 2020 and 31 December 2020

Depreciation
At 1 January 2020
Charge for year

At 31 December 2020

Net book value
At 31 December 2020

At 31 December 2019

31. Investments

Investment in subsidiaries at cost
At 1 January
Additions
Impaired during the year
Group transfers

At 31 December 

Plant and
 equipment
£000

Total
£000

173

173

112
7

119

54

61

112
7

119

54

61

Total
£000

148

14
15

29

119

134

2020
£000

2019
£000

29,989
–
–
(3,054)

26,935

35,391
3,054
(939)
(7,517)

29,989

On 30 August 2019, Macfarlane Group PLC acquired 100% of the issued share capital of Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) 
Limited (’Leyland’), for a consideration of approximately £3.25 million. £2.00 million was paid in cash on acquisition with shares 
to the value of £0.25 million issued on acquisition. Deferred consideration of £1.00 million was paid in 2020, reflecting 
performance against trading targets in the period after acquisition.

The parent company transferred its investment in Leyland to Macfarlane Group UK Limited in December 2020.

Details of the principal operating subsidiaries are set out on page 120.

112   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

32. Deferred tax assets

Deferred tax on pension scheme deficit
At 1 January
Charged to reserves
Charged to profit and loss account

At 31 December 

33. Debtors

Due within one year
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings
Other receivables
Prepayments and accrued income
Deferred tax asset (see below)

Deferred tax asset – Corporation tax losses
At 1 January
Charged to profit and loss account

At 31 December

Due after more than one year
Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings

Amounts owed by subsidiary undertakings attract interest at normal commercial rates.

34. Creditors – amounts falling due within one year 

Trade creditors
Other taxation and social security
Corporation tax
Amounts owed to subsidiary undertakings
Contingent consideration
Accruals and deferred income
Amounts due under leases (note 35)

2020
£000

439
(271)
(57)

111

2019
£000

664
(176)
(49)

439

2020
£000

2019
£000

3,580
11
248
19

3,858

38
(19)

19

2020
£000

2,750
21
326
38

3,135

104
(66)

38

2019
£000

33,545

31,162

2020
£000

47
57
135
–
–
390
14

643

2019
£000

164
10
–
21
800
324
13

1,332

The Company is a party to the Group bank borrowing facility with Lloyds Banking Group PLC, a committed facility of £30 million 
now available until December 2025. The facility bears interest at normal commercial rates and carries standard financial 
covenants in relation to interest cover and levels of headroom over the trade receivables of Macfarlane Group UK Limited,  
the principal trading subsidiary.

The Company and certain subsidiaries have given inter-company guarantees to secure the drawdown on this facility.  
The drawdown at 31 December 2020 by the subsidiary company, Macfarlane Group UK Limited amounted to £5.8 million  
(2019: £15.7 million).

113

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

35. Creditors – amounts falling due after more than one year

Amounts due under leases

Amounts due under leases
Within one year
Between one and five years
After more than five years

Total amount due
Due within one year

Due after more than one year

At 1 January
New leases
Repayments under leases

At 31 December

36. Share capital

Called up, allotted and fully paid:
At 1 January
Issued during the year

At 31 December

2020
£000

114

14
61
53

128
(14)

114

141
–
(13)

128

2019
£000

128

13
59
69

141
(13)

128

–
148
(7)

141

Number of 
25p shares

2020
£000

2019
£000

157,812,000
–

157,812,000

39,453
–

39,453

39,387
66

39,453

The Company has one class of ordinary shares, which carry no right to fixed income.

Each ordinary share carries one vote in any General Meeting of the Company. 

On 5 September 2019, the Company issued 264,382 ordinary shares of 25p each at a value of 94.56p per share as non-cash 
consideration to the Vendors of Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited, an effective value of £250,000. The shares were 
admitted to the Official List of the London Stock Exchange on 5 September 2019.

37. Reserves

Balance at 1 January 2019
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (note 7)
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to reserves
Share-based payments (note 25)
Issue of new shares (net of expenses of issue)

Balance at 1 January 2020
Profit for the year
Dividends paid (note 7)
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to reserves
Share-based payments (note 25)

Balance at 31 December 2020

114   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Share
premium
£000

Profit and
loss account
£000

12,975
–
–
–
–
173

13,148
–
–
–
–

13,148

8,267
5,373
(3,689)
862
75
–

10,888
2,122
(1,105)
1,426
75

13,406

Total
£000

21,242
5,373
(3,689)
862
75
173

24,036
2,122
(1,105)
1,426
75

26,554

38. Reconciliation of movements in shareholders’ funds 

Profit for the year
Dividends to equity holders in the year
Post-tax actuarial gain in pension scheme taken direct to equity
Share-based payments
Issue of new shares (net of issue expenses)

Movements in shareholders’ funds in the year
Opening shareholders’ funds

Closing shareholders’ funds

39. Operating profit

Operating profit for the parent company has been arrived at after charging:
Depreciation
Depreciation on right-of-use assets
Auditor’s remuneration   Audit services

Non-audit services

Staff costs
The average monthly number of employees was:
Administration

The costs incurred in respect of these employees were:
Wages and salaries
Social security costs
Other pension costs
Share-based payments (note 25)

2020
£000

2,122
(1,105)
1,426
75
–

2,518
63,489

66,007

2019
£000

5,373
(3,689)
862
75
239

2,860
60,629

63,489

2020
£000

7
15
44
11

2020
No.

10

2020
£000

924
130
61
75

1,190

2019
£000

8
14
46
36

2019
No.

10

2019
£000

1,092
144
25
75

1,336

115

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

40. Pensions
Introduction
Macfarlane Group PLC sponsors a defined benefit pension scheme for certain active and former UK employees – the Macfarlane 
Group PLC Pension & Life Assurance Scheme (1974) (’the Scheme’). Two of the trading subsidiaries, Macfarlane Group UK Limited 
and Macfarlane Labels Limited are also sponsoring employers of the Scheme. The Scheme is currently in deficit and disclosure 
of the respective proportions of the Group deficit are included and disclosed in the financial statements of each of the three 
participating employers.

The Scheme is an HMRC registered pension scheme and is administered by a Board of Trustees composed of employer-nominated 
representatives and member-nominated Trustees which is legally separate from the Group. The Scheme’s investments are 
held separately from those of the Group in managed funds under the supervision of the Trustees. The Trustees are required 
by law to act in the interest of all classes of beneficiary in the Scheme and are responsible for investment policy and the 
administration of benefits. 

The Scheme provides qualifying employees with an annual pension of 1/60 of pensionable salary for each completed year’s 
service on attainment of a normal retirement age of 65. Pensionable salaries were frozen for the remaining active members  
at the levels current at 30 April 2009 with the change taking effect from 30 April 2010. As a result no further salary inflation 
applies for active members who elected to remain in the Scheme. Active members’ benefits also include life assurance cover, 
with the payment of these benefits at the discretion of the Trustees. The Scheme was closed to new entrants during 2002.

On leaving active service a deferred member’s pension is revalued from the time of withdrawal until the pension is drawn. 
Revaluation in deferment is statutory and since 2010 has been revalued on the Consumer Price Index (’CPI’) measure of 
inflation. Revaluation of pensions in payment is a blend of fixed increases and inflationary increases depending on the relevant 
periods of accrual of benefit. For pensions in payment, the inflationary increase is currently based on the Retail Price Index 
(’RPI’) measure of inflation or based on Limited Price Indexation (’LPI’) for certain defined periods of service.

During 2012, Macfarlane Group PLC agreed with the Board of Trustees to amend benefits for pensioner, deferred and active 
members in the Scheme by offering a Pension Increase Exchange (’PIE’) option to pensioner members and a PIE option to all 
other members at retirement after 1 May 2012.

Balance sheet disclosures at 31 December 2020
The Scheme’s qualified actuary from Aon carries out triennial valuations using the Projected Unit Credit Method to determine 
the level of deficit. For the most recent triennial valuation at 1 May 2020, the results of this valuation showed that the market 
value of the relevant investments of the Scheme was £94,100,000 and represented 91% of the actuarial value of benefits that 
had accrued to members.

The investments held by the scheme and the Scheme deficit, based on the results of the actuarial valuation as at 1 May 2020, 
updated to the year-end to reflect amounts attributable to Macfarlane Group PLC, the parent company, are as shown below:

Investment class

Equities
Multi-asset diversified funds
Liability-driven investment funds
European loan fund
Secured property income fund
Cash

Fair value of scheme investments
Present value of scheme liabilities

Pension scheme deficit

2020
£000

9,175
12,624
12,585
2,598
2,501
288

39,771
(40,360)

(589)

2019
£000

8,855
10,153
11,075
2,477
2,552
113

35,225
(37,811)

(2,586)

2018
£000

6,410
7,005
11,352
2,845
2,658
60

30,330
(34,238)

(3,908)

The Trustees review the Scheme’s investments on a regular basis and consult with the Company regarding any proposed changes 
to the investment profile. During 2020 the Trustees agreed to make adjustments between the various investment categories 
to bring the overall allocations into line with the strategic asset allocation in the Trustees’ Statement of Investment Principles.

Liability-Driven Investment Funds provide a match of 100% against the impact of inflation movements on pension liabilities 
and of approximately 85% against the impact of movements in interest rates on pension liabilities.

The ability to realise the Scheme’s investments at, or close to, fair value was considered when setting the investment strategy. 
87% (2019: 86%) of the Scheme’s investments can be realised at fair value on a daily or weekly basis. The remaining investments 
have monthly or quarterly liquidity, however, whilst the income from these helps to meet the Scheme’s cash flow needs, they 

116   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

are not expected to be realised at short notice. The present value of the Scheme liabilities is derived from cash flow projections 
over a long period and is thus inherently uncertain.

The Scheme’s liabilities at 31 December 2020 were calculated on the following bases as required under FRS 17:

Assumptions

Discount rate
Rate of increase in salaries
Rate of increase in pensions in payment

2020

2019

2018

1.35%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases 
or 2.95% for LPI.
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

2.00%
0.00%
3% or 5% 
for fixed increases  
or 2.95% for LPI. 
2.15% post  
5 April 2006

2.80%
0.00%
3% or 5%  
for fixed increases  
or 3.20% for LPI. 
2.25% post  
5 April 2006

Spouse’s pension
Pensioner/active and deferred members
PIE take up rate
Inflation assumption (RPI)
Inflation assumption (CPI)
Life expectancy beyond normal retirement age of 65
Members aged 55
 Male
 Female
Members aged 65
 Male
 Female
Average uplift for GMP service

Movement in scheme deficit during the year

At 1 January
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values
Company contributions
Net finance cost
Remeasurement of pension scheme liability in the year

At 31 December

Analysis of amounts charged to operating profit
Current service cost
GMP on transfer values

Pension cost charged to operating profit

Analysis of amounts charged to other financial charges
Expected return on pension scheme investments
Interest cost of pension scheme liabilities

Other financial charges

75%/75%
65%
3.00%
2.50%

22.8 years
24.3 years

22.2 years
23.5 years
0.40%

70%/80%
45%
3.00%
2.10%

22.6 years
24.7 years

22.0 years
24.0 years
0.40%

70%/80%
45%
3.30%
2.30%

0.40%

2019
£000

(3,908)
(11)
-
388
(93)
1,038

(2,586)

(11)
–

(11)

843
(936)

(93)

2020
£000

(2,586)
(18)
(35)
391
(39)
1,698

(589)

(18)
(35)

(53)

700
(739)

(39)

Analysis of the remeasurement of the scheme deficit
Return on scheme assets (excluding amount shown in interest income)
Changes in assumptions underlying the present value of the scheme’s liabilities

Remeasurement of the pension scheme deficit

5,164
(3,466)

1,698

5,336
(4,298)

1,038

117

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information. 
Notes to the Company financial statements (continued)
For the year ended 31 December 2020

40. Pensions (continued)

Movement in the fair value of scheme assets
At 1 January
Interest income
Return on scheme assets (excluding amounts shown in interest income)
Contributions from the Company
Contributions from scheme members
Benefits paid

At 31 December

Movement in the present value of scheme liabilities
At 1 January
Service cost
GMP on transfer values
Interest cost
Contributions from scheme members
Actuarial (loss)/gain in the year
Benefits paid

At 31 December

2020
£000

2019
£000

35,225
700
5,164
391
4
(1,713)

39,771

(37,811)
(18)
(35)
(739)
(4)
(3,466)
1,713

(40,360)

30,330
843
5,336
388
7
(1,679)

35,225

(34,238)
(11)
–
(936)
(7)
(4,298)
1,679

(37,811)

The cumulative remeasurement of pension liabilities since IAS19 transition is a gain of £580,000 (2019: Loss of £1,118,000).

2020
£000

2019
£000

2018
£000

2017
£000

2016
£000

Present value of defined benefit obligations
Fair value of Scheme investments

Pension scheme deficit

(40,360)
39,771

(589)

(37,811)
35,225

(2,586)

(34,238)
30,330

(3,908)

(37,113)
32,383

(4,730)

(36,938)
31,123

(5,815)

Return on scheme investments

5,864

6,179

(22)

3,355

5,599

Percentage of scheme investments

14.7%

17.5%

(0.1%)

10.4%

18.0%

Experience adjustment to scheme investments

5,164

5,336

(817)

2,529

4,610

Percentage of scheme investments

13.0%

15.2%

(2.7%)

7.8%

14.8%

Experience adjustment on scheme liabilities

(3,466)

(4,298)

1,587

(1,634)

(6,107)

Percentage of scheme liabilities

(8.6%)

(11.4%)

4.6%

(4.4%)

(16.5%)

Defined contribution schemes
The Company also participated in a defined contribution scheme, the Macfarlane Group Personal Pension Plan. Contributions 
to the plan for the year were £8,000 (2019: £14,000) with contributions £3,000 (2019: £Nil) of payable to the plan at the balance 
sheet date.

41. Related party transactions
Transactions between the Company and its subsidiaries, which are related parties, have been eliminated on consolidation in  
the Group financial statements. The Directors have considered the implications of IAS 24 ’Related Party Disclosures’ and are 
satisfied that there are no other related party transactions occurring during the year, which require disclosure, other than 
those already disclosed in these financial statements.

118   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

Five year record

2020
£000

Restated*
2019
£000

Restated*
2018
£000

Restated*
2017
£000

Restated*
2016
£000

Turnover

230,029

225,246

217,129

195,818

179,608

Operating profit before separately disclosed items
Net interest payable

Profit before separately disclosed item
Separately disclosed item

Profit before tax
Taxation

Profit for the financial year

Basic earnings per ordinary share

Dividends

Dividends paid per ordinary share

Dividend cover

14,369
1,367

13,002
–

13,002
2,831

10,171

6.45p

1,105**

0.70p**

9.2**

13,487
1,625

11,862
–

11,862
2,262

9,600

6.09p

3,689

2.34p

2.6

11,878
823

11,055
330

10,725
2,114

8,611

5.47p

3,387

2.15p

2.5

9,924
837

9,087
–

9,087
1,803

7,284

5.12p

2,854

2.00p

2.6

8,551
904

7,647
–

7,647
1,730

5,917

4.57p

2,358

1.84p

2.5

*  Details of the restatements are set out on pages 76 and 77.
**  This reflects the cancellation of the dividend of 1.76p payable in June 2020.

This table reflects the five-year record for the Group’s operations as classified at 31 December 2020.

119

Overview.  Strategic review.  Governance.  Financial statements.  Shareholder information.Principal operating subsidiaries and related undertakings

Company name

Principal activities

Country of registration

Macfarlane Group UK Limited 1
Coventry  

Tel: 02476 511511

Tel: 01772 331780

Tel: 0116 2641050

Tel: 01296 652700

Nelsons for Cartons & Packaging Limited 1
Leicester 
Harrisons Packaging Limited 1
Leyland 
Ecopac (U.K.) Limited 1
Aylesbury 
Leyland Packaging Company (Lancs) Limited 1
Leyland 
Nottingham Recycling Limited 1
Nottingham 
Macfarlane Group B.V. 2 
Hoofddorp 
Macfarlane Labels Limited 3
Kilmarnock  

Tel: 00 31 235689207

Tel: 0115 986 7181

Tel: 01772 622622

Tel: 01563 525151

Macfarlane Group Ireland  
(Labels & Packaging) Limited 4
Wicklow  
Macfarlane Group Sweden AB 5
Helsingborg 

Tel: 00 46 42 13 75 55

Tel: 00 353 1281 0234

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment. Design  
and manufacture of specialist packaging.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Recovery of waste paper and corrugated  
board for recycling.

Supply and distribution of all forms of  
packaging materials and equipment.

Manufacture of high quality printed self-adhesive  
labels and resealable labelling solutions.

Manufacture of high quality printed self-adhesive  
labels and resealable labelling solutions and supply and 
distribution of packaging materials and equipment.

Provision of high quality printed self-adhesive  
labels and resealable labelling solutions.

England

England

England

England

England

England

The Netherlands

Scotland

Ireland

Sweden

All the above subsidiaries are wholly owned either by Macfarlane Group PLC or one of its subsidiary companies and 
operate in the country of registration. The Group controls 100% of the ordinary share capital of each subsidiary.  
The Group’s other related undertakings are the dormant subsidiary undertakings disclosed below. In all cases the 
Company listed as owner controls 100% of the issued share capital of the dormant subsidiary undertaking.

Company name

Company number

Country of registration

Owned by Macfarlane Group PLC
National Packaging Group Limited 1 
Adhesive Labels Limited 1

Owned by Macfarlane Group UK Limited
Online Packaging Limited 1 
Macfarlane Packaging Limited 6 
Abbott’s Packaging Limited 1 
Mitchell Packaging Limited 1 
Greenwoods Stock Boxes Limited 6 
Network Packaging Limited 1 
Tyler Packaging (Leicester) Limited 1

Owned by Harrisons Packaging Limited
Temperature Controlled Packaging Limited 1

Owned by Network Packaging Limited
Networkpack Limited 1

Owned by Macfarlane Group Sweden AB
ReSeal-it Scandinavia 5 
Regath HB 5

01355867 
00723320

02903657 
SC041678 
00372831 
00535311 
SC576825 
03400627 
03460830

06896225

07076439

556480-9845 
969610-8753

England 
England

England 
Scotland 
England 
England 
Scotland 
England 
England

England

England

Sweden 
Sweden

Registered offices
1 Siskin Parkway East, Middlemarch Business Park, Coventry, CV3 4PE
2 Siriusdreef 17, 2132 WT, Hoofddorp, The Netherlands
3 Bentinck Street, Kilmarnock, KA1 4AS 

4 Kilmacullagh, Newtownmountkennedy, Co. Wicklow, Ireland 
5 Kapplöpningsgatan 14, f252 30 Helsingborg, Sweden 
6 3 Park Gardens, Glasgow, G3 7YE

120   Macfarlane Group PLC Annual Report and Accounts 2020

 
Financial diary

Financial results
Interim: Announced – August 
Final: Announced – February

Accounts and Annual General Meeting
Report and financial statements – Posted to shareholders on 2 April 2021 
Annual General Meeting – Held in Glasgow on 11 May 2021

Shareholder enquiries
Macfarlane Group PLC’s ordinary shares are classified under the ‘Industrial 
– General’ section of the Industrial Sector on the London Stock Exchange.

Enquiries regarding shareholdings, dividend payments, dividend mandate 
instructions, lost share certificates, tax vouchers, changes of address, 
transfers of shares to another person and other administrative matters  
should be addressed to the Company’s registrars, 

Equiniti   
Aspect House 
Spencer Road 
Lancing 
West Sussex, BN99 6DA

Telephone: 0371 384 2439 
Website: www.shareview.co.uk

The Company’s website, www.macfarlanegroup.com provides details  
of all major Stock Exchange announcements, details of the current share 
price and information about Macfarlane Group’s business.

Designed and produced by Thunderbolt Projects 

Head Office
Macfarlane Group PLC
First Floor 
3 Park Gardens 
Glasgow G3 7YE 
t. 0141 333 9666 
e. investorinfo@macfarlanegroup.com
www.macfarlanegroup.com

M

a

c

f

a

r

l

a

n

e

G

r

o

u

p

P

L

C

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

2

0